IJIFR VOLUME 4 ISSUE 5 , JANUARY 2017 SECTION 2

VOLUME-4, ISSUE-5 

JANUARY 2017 

CONSECUTIVE 41 ST EDITION 

SECTION-II 

PAGE NUMBER 

(6259- 6424)

6259-6265 

6266-6270 

6271-6275 

www.ijifr.com Impact Factor =5.081 ISSN: 2347-1697 

International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research 

List of Papers Published in IJIFR - Volume 4-Issue 5, January 2017 

Sr. 

No. 

Paper ID, Subject Area, Paper Title & Author’s Details 

1 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 035 Subject Electronics & Communication Engg. 

Title 

Author’s 

Design and Verification of a Robust Neural Network 

Based Kannada Base Character Recognition System 

Mohankuamar.V 

Assistant Professor 

Department of Electronic & Comm. Engineering, 

Dr. Ambedkar Institute of Technology , Bengaluru-Karnataka 

Dr. G.V. Jayaramaiah 

Professor 


Dr. Ambedkar Institute of Technology , Bengaluru-Karnataka 

2 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 037 Subject Computer Engineering 

Title Social Cognition and Professional Competencies 

among B.T Assistant Teachers 

Author’s Swathi Venugopal 

M.Tech. Student, Department of Computer Engineering, 

Viswajyothi College of Engineering and Technology 

Ernakulam, Kerala 

Shibu K.R 

Associate Professor, 

Department of Computer Engineering, 



3 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 039 Subject Education 

Title 

Author’s 

Impact of Vermicompost on Food Utilization of some 

Fresh Water Fishes by Cage Culture Method 

Dr. Joycy Jay Manoharam 


PG & Research Department of Zoology 

K.N.G.A.College for women (Autonomous) 

Thanjavur-Tamilnadu 

S. Sujitha 

Research Scholar 




Page 

No. 

Section II 

IJIFR Continuous 41 st Edition 

I

6276-6285 

6286-6289 

6290-6296 

6297-6320 





Title 

Author’s 

A Study of Effectiveness of Toolkit of Life Skill 

Education Programme on Visual-Spatial Intelligence 

of Secondary School Students 

Dr. (Mrs.) Mintu Sinha 

Principal, Bombay Teachers’ Training College 

Colaba, Mumbai-Maharashtra 

Dr. Bhagwan Balani 

Assistant Professor, Bombay Teachers’ Training College 


5 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 051 Subject Elec. & Telecomm. Engg. 

Title 

Smart Automated Water Distribution System using 

PLC 

Author’s Ashitosh A. Salunkhe, Dhiraj D. Pawar, Ashwini L. 

Patil, Snehal B. Pawar 


Department of Elec. & Telecomm. Engg., 

Nanasaheb Mahadik College of Engineering, 

Walwa, Sangli-Maharashtra 

6 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 057 Subject Civil Engineering 

Title 

Author’s 

Experimental Study on Partial Replacement of Cement 

by Coconut Shell Ash for Normal and High Strength 

Concrete 

Vijaya Kumar Y.M. 

Assistant Professor, Department of Civil Engineering 

Adichunchanagiri Institute of Technology College 

Chikamagalur, Karnataka, (India) 

Deepika R. 

M.Tech. (Structural Engineering) Student 



7 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 059 Subject MBA Tech. 

Title 

Author’s 

Future Of Robotics In Banking 

Dr. Anuja Agarwal 

Associate Dean, Associate Dean, 

Mukesh Patel School of Technology, Management and 

Engineering, SVKM’s NMIMS University Mumbai- 

Maharashtra 

Section II 


II

6321- 

6325 

6348- 

6353 

6326-6333 

6334-6347 




Rohan Arora, Kriti Dua, Meryl Cherian 

MBA Tech. Student 


Engineering , SVKM’s NMIMS University Mumbai- 

Maharashtra 


Title Scientific Attitude among Tribal Students at 

Elementary Level of Idukki District 

Author’s Laly K. P. 

Senior Research Fellow, School of Pedagogical Sciences 

Mahatma Gandhi University, Kottayam-Kerala 

9 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 009 Subject Mechanical Engineering 

Title 

Author’s 

Streamlining of Processes & Integration of Customer 

Requirements in Engine Production using Quality Gate 

Methodology 

Supriya Darekar 

Assistant Professor, Department of Mechanical Engineering 

Bharati Vidyapeeth college of Engineering & Technology, 

Kolhapur- Maharashtra 

D. V. Pendam 

Assistant Professor, Department of Production Engineering 

Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute 

Matunga, Mumbai-Maharashtra 

10 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 056 Subject Human Resources 

Title 

Author’s 

Review of Challenges Faced by Global Expatriates and 

Onsite Project Employees in their Host Countries and 

at Time of Repatriation 

Preeti Chaudhary , Harman Singh 

Student, Symboisis Institute of Management Studies 

Pune-Maharashtra 

Dr. Suruchi Pandey 

Associate Professor, Symboisis Institute of Management Studies 



Title 

System of Tracking Public Issues 

Section II 


III

6354-6360 

6361-6382 

6383-6391 




Author’s 

Kavita Pokharkar, Archana Tajane, Priyanka Kale 

Priyanka Gaikwad 

Student 

Department of Computer Engineering 

Matoshri College of Engineering & Research Center, Nashik, 

Maharashtra 

Prof. P. R. Dholi 

Professor, Department of Computer Engineering 

Matoshri College of Engineering & Research Center, 

Nashik, Maharashtra 

12 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 046 Subject Library Services 

Title 

Author’s 

A study on Library Resources and Services provided 

by the Degree Colleges of Hyderabad Karnataka 

Region 

Dr. G. S. Biradar 

Assistant Librarian, Gulbarga University, 

P.G.Centre, Raichur- Karnataka 

13 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 061 Subject Management Studies 

Title 

Author’s 

The Impact of Patanjali Products on the FMCG 

Business Hither to Dominated by Multi-Nationals like 

Hul, P&G, Nestle etc. 

Dr. Anuja Agarwal 

Associate Dean, Mukesh Patel School of Technology, 

Management, and Engineering , SVKM’s NMIMS University 

Mumbai-Maharashtra 

Sakshi Gupta, Srashti Gupta, Vinayak Nautiyal 

MBA Tech. Student 


Engineering , SVKM’s NMIMS University 



Author’s 

Establishing the Relationship Between Learning Style 

and Leadership Potential of Higher Secondary 

Students of Different School Background 

Dr. R. Portia 


Department of Education, 

Alagappa University College of Education, 

Alagappa University, Karaikudi -Tamil Nadu 

Section II 


IV

6418- 

6424 

6392-6397 

6398-6403 

6404-6410 

6411-6417 




15 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 065 Subject Homoeopathy 

Title 

Author’s 

To Study the Effectiveness of Homoeopathic Medicines 

in Allergic Rhinitis 

Dr. Siva Rami Reddy. E 

PhD Scholar, 

Sri Ganganagar Homoeopathic Medical College, 

Hospital and Research Center, 

Sri Ganganagar, Rajasthan, India 

16 Paper ID IJIFR/V4 /E5/ 067 Subject Biotechnology 

Title Chitosan from Shrimp Bio-Waste : Potential 

Antibacterial Agent 

Author’s 

Vinusha Bellamkonda, Vidya Sagar Reddy Gundarapu 

Research Scholars, Department of Biotechnology, 

Vikrama Simhapuri University, Nellore, Andhra Pradesh, India 

Vijaya Chalamacherla 

Assistant Professor, Department of Marine Biology, 

Vikrama Simhapuri University, Nellore, Andhra Pradesh, India 


Title 

Author’s 

Data Mining Techniques for Fraud Detection in Health 

Insurance 

Pranali Pawar 

M.tech. Student, Department of Computer Engineering, 

Sandip Institute of Technology and Research Centre , 


Namrata Ghuse 

Professor, Department of Computer Engineering, 




Title 

Privacy Preserving Data Leak Detection 

Author’s 

Sarisha Kumari.S 

M.Tech. Student, Department of Computer Engineering, 

Musaliar College of Engineering and Technology 

Pathanamthitta, Kerala 


Title 

Segmentation of Handwritten Tamil Character from 

Palm Script using Histogram Approach 

Section II 


V




Author’s 

B. Kiruba, A. Nivethitha, Dr. M. Vimaladevi 

Assistant Professor, 

Department of Computer Science & Engineering 

Hindusthan Institute of Technology, Coimbatore 

Section II 


VI

www.ijifr.com 

Volume 4 Issue 5 January 2017 

International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research ISSN: 2347-1697 

Design and Verification of a Robust Neural 

Network Based Kannada Base Character 

Recognition System 

Electronic & 

Paper ID IJIFR/V4/ E5/ 035 Page No. 6259-6265 Subject Area 

Comm. Engg. 

Character Recognition, Neural Network, Back Propagation, Kannada Script, 

Key Words 

DCT, DWT and KLT 

1 st Mohankuamar.V 

2 nd 

Dr.G.V.Jayaramaiah 



Dr. Ambedkar Institute of Technology , 

Bengaluru-Karnataka 

Professor 


Dr. Ambedkar Institute of Technology , 

Bengaluru-Karnataka 

Abstract 

This paper describes a design and validation of neural network based 

Kannada character recognition system. The proposed character recognition 

system is robust against size, font, thickness and tilting of the characters. 

The proposed system recognizes printed characters in Kannada, a south 

Indian language. The input to the system is scanned image of base 

character and the output is labeling of the character. The system extracts 

the geometrical features and recognizes the characters using neural 

network back propagation algorithm. The results demonstrated are 

independent of the font, size and tilting of the characters and system is seen 

to deliver reasonable performance. 

I. INTRODUCTION 

Character Recognition (CR) is concerned with the automatic detection or classification of 

characters for different languages like English, Kannada, Telugu, and Tamil etc. India is a 

multi-lingual, multi-script country. Considerably less work has been done towards character 

recognition of Indian languages than for other languages [1]. Currently there are many CR 

systems available for handling printed English documents with reasonable levels of 

accuracy. However, there are not many reported efforts at developing CR systems for Indian 

. 

This work is published under Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License 

Copyright©IJIFR 2017 

6259

ISSN: 2347-1697 

International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (IJIFR) 

Volume - 4, Issue -5, January 2017 

Continuous 41 st Edition, Page No: 6259-6265 

languages. Authors of reference [2], have applied OCR systems for some of the Indian 

languages. The work reported in this paper is motivated by the fact that there are no reported 

efforts at developing document analysis systems for the south Indian language of Kannada. 

In reference [3] authors have developed font and size independent OCR system for 

Kannada. In [3] for the character analysis, shaped based feature extraction is obtained by 

using Vector Machine method. The drawback of the system is its speed and simplicity. In 

reference [4] the authors proposed a system that implements machine recognition of printed 

Kannada characters. This methodology extracts the co-efficients of DCT, DWT and KLT. 

This system exhibits complexity in design. The authors of the reference [5] proposed a 

Kannada OCR system using Database approach. This system is not independent of size and 

font. 

This paper describes a character recognition system for printed text documents in Kannada 

which is independent of size, translation and rotation. The system is implemented using the 

neural network back propagation algorithm. The rest of the paper is organized as follows. 

Section 2 describes the Kannada characters and brings out some of the special 

characteristics of the script from the point of view of developing a CR system. In section 3 

the principles and methodology of the proposed system is explained. The implementation of 

the system is given in Section 4. Section 5 presents some results to illustrate the current 

capabilities of the system. Finally conclusions are drawn in Section 6. 

II. KANNADA CHARACTERS 

The language Kannada has 51 alphabets, which is classified into 16 vowels and 35 

consonants. The Kannada akshara shows three distinct vertical regions. The top region, 

which ends just below the short head line of the consonant symbol, contains the vowel 

modifiers and sometimes parts of the base consonant. Some letters may not have a head line, 

and, in that case, the location of the top zone of neighboring letters can be used. The middle 

region contains the consonant glyphs and some vowel modifiers. The vowel modifier glyphs 

may appear as either connected or disconnected components to the right of the base 

consonant. The middle region ends where the base consonants end. The bottom region 

which extends below the base consonant consists of glyphs for the consonant conjuncts and 

the glyphs for some vowel modifiers. These glyphs generally appear disconnected from the 

base consonant and the vowel modifiers present in the middle zone. 

III. 

PRINCIPLES AND METHODOLOGY 

In the proposed system the input is a page of text which is scanned through a flat bed 

scanner at 300 DPI and binarised using a global threshold computed automatically based on 

the specific image. The lines and words are then separated using the appropriate horizontal 

and vertical projections. The words are then segmented into smaller parts. To achieve this 

segmentation, the word is first split into three vertical zones based on the horizontal 

projection for the word. The three zones are then horizontally segmented using their vertical 

projections, which are the inputs to the recognizer. The recognizer extracts a set of features 

from the bitmaps of the segments. The feature vector is then classified using a classifier. 

Mohankuamar.V, Dr. G. V. Jayaramaiah :: Design and 

Verification of a Robust Neural Network Based Kannada Base 

Character Recognition System 

6260

ISSN: 2347-1697 




The labels for the segments from the three zones output by the classifier are then combined 

and a ASCII text containing the transliterated version of recognized Kannada character is 

the output. 

Here the geometrical features are extracted using the following steps: 

1. Calculating the Center of Gravity [6] for each character. 

2. Finding Radial Co-Ordinates, Normalized Co-Ordinates and 

3. Applying the Rapid Transform [7] on the co-ordinates. 

Following the above steps the feature vectors of the given character are obtained, which are 

robust against its size, translational and rotation. Once the geometrical feature extraction of 

the Kannada characters are obtained, the characters are classified using the Neural network 

Classifier. Figure1 shows the block diagram representation of the character recognition 

system, which include four main steps. i.e. Kannada base character, Geometrical feature 

extraction, Segmentation and Neural Network Classifier. 

Kannada 

Base 

Character 

Geometrical 

Feature 

Extraction 

Segmentation 

Neural 

Network 

Classifier 

Figure 1: Kannada Recognition System 

IV. IMPLEMENTATION 

4.1 Three Zone Segmentation of a Word 

It is well known fact that Kannada characters are different and difficult from English 

characters due to the presence of compound characters, i.e., in Kannada there are three 

zones the top zone (consisting of vowel modifiers), middle zone (consisting of base 

characters) and the bottom zone (consisting of consonant conjuncts and vowel modifiers). 

Kannada characters in any word are isolated, but not in English. The proposed system 

segments all these three zones by using horizontal projection profile. Figure 3 shows the 

histogram of a word. 

Step1: read the bmp image of a word. 

Step2: divide word into three zones-top zone, middle zone and bottom zone, perform this by 

using histograms. 

Step3: The middle zone of a word is extracted, which is the base character. 

Step4: then apply character segmentation. 

Figure 2 shows the three zones segmentation of a word and figure 3 shows the histogram of 

a horizontal projection profile of figure 2 

Figure 2: Image shows three zone segmentation 




6261

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Figure 3: Image shows horizontal projection profile of the three zone segmentation. 

After three zone segmentation, three zones are stored in different files as shown in Fig. 4- 

Fig.6. Figure 4 shows the top zone of a word which consist of only vowel modifiers. For all 

the base characters the vowel “A()” is used. 

Figure 4: Top zone (vowel modifiers) of three zone segmentation 

Figure 5 shows the middle zone of a word which consists of only base characters. Base 

characters are used to extract the features in the proposed Kannada character recognition 

system. 

Figure 5: Middle zone (base characters) of three zone segmentation 

Figure 6 shows the bottom zone of a word which consists of vowel modifier and consonant 

conjuncts. 

Figure 6: Bottom zone (consonant conjuncts) of three zone segmentation. 

4.2 Character Segmentation 

The middle zone of a word is taken as an input to the character segmentation stage. In this 

stage each character is separated from a word by using vertical projection profile. The entire 

process of the segmentation is as follows. 

Step1: read the bmp image of a middle zone of a word. 

Step2: then find vertical project vector of entire bmp image of a word. 

Step3: use the vector obtained in step2 to find minima and maxima of a word horizontally. 

Step4: then find start and end of an each character 

Step5: and then segment the word into characters. 




6262

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Figure 7 shows the segmentation of a character from a middle zone of a word using vertical 

projection profile. Figure 8 shows the histogram of a vertical projection profile of a word. 

Figure 7: Character segmentation of a word. 

4.3 Preprocessor 

Figure 8: image shows histogram of vertical projection profile 

In this stage each character is taken as input and extracts the features that are information of 

interest. For this the following steps are followed: 

Step1: Read the bmp black and white image of Kannada base character store this into two 

dimension array for further processing. 

Step2: then calculate the center of gravity of an entire black pixel. 

Step3: then convert the Cartesian co-ordinates into radial co-coordinate with respect to 

center of gravity. 

Step4: calculate average of radial co-ordinates. 

Step5: find normalized radial co-ordinate by dividing all the radial co-ordinate by average 

calculated in step-4. 

Step6: divide these normalize radial co-ordinate into L (2 N =32) number of parts. 

Step7: count the number of normalized radial co-ordinate in each part. 

Step8: In each part add the entire normalized radial coordinate. 

Step9: for each part there will be a double value which is equal to sum divided by count. 

Step10: than finally pass this vector to Rapid Transform. 

From this stage a translation, size and rotation invariant feature vectors are obtained. These 

vectors are classified using neural network classifier explained in the next section. 

4.4 Neural Network Classifier 

The neural network classifier [8] is designed using the following steps: 




6263

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Step1: Choose three layers: first one as a linear layer (Input layer), second one as a sigmoid 

layer (Hidden layer) and third one is also as a sigmoid layer (Output layer). 

Step2: Choose two full synapse. Add first synapse between input layer and hidden layer and 

second synapse between hidden layer and output layer. 

Step3: Add a teacher file to input layer and a result file and teacher file to output layer 

Step4: Set a monitor for network. 

Step5: Use monitor for setting learning rate, momentum and epoch. 

Step6: Train the neural network. 

Using the above steps, an algorithm is developed and its efficacy is tested by inputting 

number of Kannada characters. The results of this test are given in the following section. 

V. RESULTS AND ANALYSYS 

The sequence of steps followed in the character recognition system given in this paper is as 

follows. A word of Kannada base character is used as input to the scanner. The scanner 

scans the document and produces the output in the image format (.bmp). The first step is 

segmentation, which segments the word into characters. Character is an input to the 

preprocessor, which extracts the geometrical features. 

In the final step it is required to label/classifying the characters using neural network back 

propagation algorithm. Figure 9 shows the final output. That is recognition of character(ka) 

with different size and angle. 

Figure 9: Kannada character (Ka) test patterns that are recognized 

Table1 shows the testing of OCR system for Recognition of individual characters with 

different size and different angle, the system works successfully. 

Table 1: System Testing 

Item being tested Recognition of all basic symbols of Kannada character 

Sample Input Image of Kannada character with different size and angle. 

Expected output Classification or label 

Actual output Successful 

Remarks Pass 

VI. CONCLUSION 

In this paper a CR system for processing printed text documents in Kannada, a South Indian 

language is described. Starting with the image of a printed Kannada base character, the 

system first separates words into sub-character-level pieces using a strategy that is tailored 

to the special features of the script. This paper has achieved a novel feature vectors that 

characterizes the distribution of foreground pixels in radial and angular directions. Using 

these features, each of the segments of a word is classified using a neural network classifier. 

The labels so obtained are then put together to effect recognition of individual characters in 

the word. The system has achieved the character recognition, independent of the size, 




6264

ISSN: 2347-1697 




translational and rotation of character. The system obtains results, which delivers reasonable 

recognition of accuracy. Simple invariant pattern recognition system proposed in this paper 

necessitates the preprocessor, which involves simple computational steps. Thus, it is 

computationally inexpensive and easier to implement. When the neural network is trained 

by back propagation algorithm, the system shows better recognition performance. However, 

the system tested with all Kannada base characters. 

VII. REFERENCES 

[1] Dinesh Achaya U, N V Subba Reddy and Krishnamoorthi, “Hierarchical Recognition System 

for Machine Printed Kannada Characters” IJCSNS International Journal of Computer Science 

and Network S 44 ecurity, VOL.8 No.11, November 2008 

[2] R. M. K. Sinha and H. N. Mahabala, “Machine Recognition of Devanagari Script,” IEEE 

Transactions on Systems, Man, and Cybernetics, Vol. 8, 1979, pp. 435-441. 

[3] T V Ashwin and P S Sastry. “A font and size independent OCR system for printed Kannada 

document using support vector machines”. Sadhana, vol.27, part 1, febraury2002, page. 35-58. 

[4] B.Vijay Kumar and A.G.Ramakrishnan. “Machine Recognition of Printed Kannada Text”. 

Springer-verlag berlin Heiderberg 2002, LNCS 2423, page. 37-48. 

[5] B.M.Sagar, Dr.Shobha G, Dr. Ramakanth Kumar.P. ”Converting Printed Kannada text Image 

file to Machine Editable format using Database Approach”. International journal of 

Computers, issue 2, vol.2, 2008, page.172-175. 

[6] http://physics.2lv.in/blog/node/70 

[7] H.A. Almohamad. “A Pattern Recognition Algorithm Based on the Rapid Transform”. IEEE, 

1988, page. 445-449. 

[8] ”Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”. By Jacek M. Zurada, Jaico Publishing House, 4th 

Impression 2001. 

TO CITE THIS PAPER 

Mohankuamar, V., Jayaramaiah, G. V. (2017) :: “Design and Verification of a Robust 

Neural Network Based Kannada Base Character Recognition System” International 

Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347-1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), 

January 2017, pp. 6259-6265, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/035. 




6265

www.ijifr.com 



A Comprehensive Study Of Image 

Matching Techniques 


Key Words SIFT, LLT, P2F Matching, Structured Matching, AB-SIFT 

Computer 

Engineering 

1 st Swathi Venugopal 

2 nd Shibu K.R 

M.Tech. Student 




Associate Professor 




Abstract 

Image matching refers to the automatic identification and measurement of 

corresponding image points that are located on the overlapping area of 

multiple images. Matching algorithms play an important role in deciding 

correspondences between two image scenes. The proficiency of an image 

matching algorithm depends on the region of experimental set up and 

assumptions considered by the researchers. Several image matching 

techniques have been studied to address this problem. This study highlights 

latest methodologies and feature extraction methods used by researchers for 

image matching. 


Image matching is an essential step in multiple image processing applications; including 

image registration, image retrieval, stereo and 3D reconstruction. It can also be applied to 

various applications that deal with identifying and searching of matching images. Matching 

deals with finding correspondences between the images. For dealing with large images 

feature based matching techniques are used. In feature based image matching, features are 

extracted and matching is performed using the characteristics of these extracted features 

thereby limiting the computational cost required to accomplish the task. When matching 

large images, the number of features is expected to increase with the image size thereby 

making the process a computationally cumbersome task. The most efficient way to 

. 



6266

ISSN: 2347-1697 




circumvent the computational cost while matching large images is through pyramidal 

schemes. Pyramidal schemes are techniques that use a large number of sub sampled versions 

of the reference and target image and use the intermediate resolutions. Other techniques 

also can be used which may impose spatial constraints on the matching process making 

extraction of points that correspond to the same location from pairs of large sized images 

easy. The survey consists of the different methods and algorithms to image matching, 

correlation, and feature detection and illumination invariance of two images. 

II. ROBUST SCALE INVARIANT FEATURE MATCHING 

For multi source remote sensing images having significant illumination, rotation and scene 

differences, extraction of well distributed and precisely aligned point pairs for image 

registration is a difficult task. So a scale invariant feature transform approach is used as a 

feature based image matching algorithm in a number of automatic registration of remote 

sensing images. Although SIFT provides distinctiveness and robustness it suffers from 

problems in quality, quantity and distribution of extracted features in multi source remote 

sensing images. An improved SIFT algorithm [1] is introduced that is fully automated and 

applicable to remote sensing images. This approach selects SIFT features in the full 

distribution of location and scale where the features are selected based on the qualities like 

stability and distinctiveness. Features thus extracted are subjected to initial cross matching 

process which is then followed by a consistency check in the projective transformation 

model. This approach is efficient in terms of computational efficiency and is applicable to 

various remote sensing images with different illumination, resolution, scene changes etc. 

III. LLT ALGORITHM FOR IMAGE MATCHING 

Remote sensing images often contain local distortions due to view point changes and ground 

relief variations and so they may not be exactly match able. The number of false matches is 

also high due to the complex nature of the remote sensing images. The scale of the extracted 

feature point is extremely large for remote sensing images which poses burden on feature 

matching. Feature matching is the establishment of correspondences between the features. 

In order to address these issues [2] a locally linear transforming algorithm is introduced for 

rigid and non rigid feature matching of remote sensing images. Based on the feature 

similarity a set of putative correspondence is created. In this approach a latent variable is 

associated with each correspondence which indicates whether it is an inlier or outlier. It then 

estimates the inliers set by using expectation maximization algorithm. A local geometric 

constraint is used to preserve local structures among neighbouring feature points after 

transformation. This helps to recover accurate correspondence. The advantage of this 

approach is that in the case of severe outliers it can handle both rigid and non rigid 

transformations. Also, it can be applied to various registration tasks in remote sensing. 

IV. AB-SIFT DESCRIPTOR BASED IMAGE MATCHING 

For many photogrammetric and remote sensing applications like image registration and 

image mosaicking, local invariant feature based image matching is very crucial. An adaptive 

Swathi Venugopal, Shibu K.R :: A Comprehensive Study Of Image 


6267

ISSN: 2347-1697 




binning scale invariant feature transform [3] which is robust to local geometric distortions is 

introduced for remote sensing image matching. Local feature descriptor is computed using 

an adaptive binning strategy. Descriptor uses an adaptive histogram quantization strategy 

for location and gradient orientations that is robust and resistant to local view point 

distortions. Local feature region is divided into different areas and histograms of each area 

are computed. These histograms are concatenated to form the final descriptor. Advantage of 

the adaptive binning strategy is the robustness to local geometric distortions. The 

disadvantage of the system is that the performance may get degraded due to the illumination 

differences. 

V. PRIORITIZED P2F MATCHING 

In many computer vision applications the process of finding the accurate position and 

orientation from the image was taken is difficult. A novel approach for efficient and 

effective localization of the large scale based image is presented in [4]. For that a prioritized 

point to feature matching approach is used. This prioritized point to feature matching makes 

use of the co visibility information. A set of points from all parts of the model are selected 

and they are matched against the query image based on the descending order of the 

priorities. When, a new match is found at a point the priorities of all the other points near 

that point are increased. The process is repeated until some hundred matches are found or 

until certain number of points has been tried out. In order to reject the ambiguous matches 

ratio test is performed finally. It is performed by finding two nearest neighbours of the query 

descriptor. Correspondence is established if they pass the ratio test. That is if the ratio of the 

points to the descriptor point is below the threshold value T where T can be 0.6 or 0.8. 

Advantages of this method is that it is efficient and effective in estimating correct camera 

poses and also it has the fastest run times. The disadvantage in using this method is that in 

larger image models the localization effectiveness is reduced. This is because the 2D to 3D 

matches may reject many correct matches. 

VI. NNCF BASED MATCHING 

A nearest neighbour collaborative filtering based patch matching is introduced for image denoising 

in [5]. It involves matching query patches with other similar patches. The similar 

patches can be from a noisy database or from an external database. The close neighbours are 

considered as the patches that have the closest similarities with the query patches. In most of 

the cases this information may not be available at the beginning. In such cases we either use 

an external database or a noisy image. That is the close neighbours are selected either from 

an external clean database or from a noisy image. The advantages of using collaborative 

filtering based matching is that it is effective in noisy scenarios, it provides robustness in the 

patch matching stage and finally it improves the performance of the system. 

VII. LARGE IMAGE MATCHING USING COUPLED DECOMPOSITION 

For large sized images the accurate extraction of tie points that belong to the same location 

is a difficult task. So a novel method was introduced [6] that imposes spatial constraints on 



6268

ISSN: 2347-1697 




the matching process which do not make use of sub sampled versions of the reference and 

target image. For that a new technique called coupled image decomposition is used where 

the image are split into subimages. This process is theoretically invariant to noise, global 

radiometric differences and geometric differences. This is also considered to be robust to 

local changes. In the matching process performing coupled decomposition scale invariant 

feature transform is applied and the features are extracted. Then matching is performed. 

Finally, a partial fundamental matrix is used to find the re projection errors if any. This 

coupled decomposition is tested on a dataset consisting of several planetary images. These 

planetary images may be different in size and may vary from one mega pixel to several 

hundreds of mega pixels. The experimental results show a substantial reduction of 

computational cost when matching large images without compromising the overall matching 

accuracy. It is also helpful in estimating local regions that cannot be successfully matched. 

This method of matching has got several advantages. It reduces the complexity, decreases 

the computational cost and also increases the matching accuracy while matching large 

images. It also has some disadvantages. It cannot extract more gradient information. Also, 

the complications due to illumination difference are high. 

VIII. STRUCTURED MATCHING 

A structured matching method is presented in [7]. This method was introduced to deal with 

the problem of person re identification. It deals with maintaining the identities of the people 

traversing various locations captured by camera network. This method a bipartite graph 

matching is used where all the entities are considered as nodes of the graph thereby forming 

two sets of nodes, probe set and gallery set. The matching relations are considered as edges 

with weights varying from {0,1}. So the method can be considered as weighted bipartite 

matching method which identifies matches between two individuals viewed in two different 

cameras. The main idea of structured matching is to reduce the feasible solution space. The 

advantages of this method are it demands only low storage and has good computational 

efficiency. This enables the method to be used in various real world applications. For further 

reducing the computational complexity, weight matrix can be decomposed into separable 

matrices. Such decomposition will accelerate the computational. 

IX. CONCLUSION 

Image matching and recognition methods are mainly used in computer vision application. 

The survey includes different methods to improve the matching of two or more images. 

Image matching and recognition methods are mainly used in computer vision application. 

This work is a survey of some selected recent image matching techniques. A more accurate 

matching solution can be obtained by combining more than one approach. The survey shows 

that each of the techniques has its own relative merits and demerits. A good image matching 

technique is considered as the one which can estimate local regions that cannot be 

successfully matched, which can deal with illumination differences, extraction of gradient 

information and also viewpoint distortions. 



6269

X. REFERENCES 

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[1] Amin Sedaghat, Mehdi Mokhtarzade, and Hamid Ebadi, Uniform Robust Scale-Invariant 

Feature Matching for Optical Remote Sensing Images, " Transactions On Geoscience And 

Remote Sensing, vol. 49, no. 11, November 2011 

[2] Jiayi Ma, Huabing Zhou, Ji Zhao, Yuan Gao, Junjun Jiang, and Jinwen Tian, Robust 

Feature Matching for Remote Sensing Image Registration via Locally Linear Transforming, 

"IEEE Transactions On Geoscience And Remote Sensing,vol. 53, no. 12, December 2015 

[3] Amin Sedaghat and Hamid Ebadi, Remote Sensing Image Matching Based on Adaptive 

Binning SIFT Descriptor, " IEEE Transactions On Geoscience And Remote Sensing, vol. 

53, no. 10, October 2015 

[4] Torsten Sattler, Member, IEEE, Bastian Leibe, Member, IEEE, and Leif Kobbelt, Efficient 

Effective Prioritized Matching for Large-Scale Image-Based Localization, "IEEE 

Transactions On Pattern Analysis And Machine Intelligence, vol. X, no. Y, month,year 

[5] Shibin Parameswaran, Student Member, IEEE, Enming Luo, Student Member,IEEE, and 

Truong Q. Nguyen, Fellow, IEEE, Patch Matching for Image Denoising Using 

Neighborhood-based Collaborative Filtering, "IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems 

for Video Technology 

[6] Panagiotis Sidiropoulos, Member, IEEE, Jan-Peter Muller, Member, IEEE, Matching of 

Large Images Through Coupled Decomposition, "IEEE Transactions On Image Processing, 

vol. 24, no. 7, July 2015 

[7] Ziming Zhang, Member, IEEE, and Venkatesh Saligrama, Member, IEEE, PRISM: Person 

Re-Identi_cation via Structured Matching, "IEEE Transactions On Circuits And Systems For 

Video Technology 


Venugopal, S., Shibu, K.R (2017) :: “A Comprehensive Study Of Image Matching 

Techniques” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347- 

1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6266-6270, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/037. 



6270

www.ijifr.com 



Impact of Vermicompost on Food 

Utilization of some Fresh Water Fishes 

by Cage Culture Method 

Paper ID IJIFR/V4/ E5/ 039 Page No. 6271-6275 Subject Area Zoology 

Key Words 

Food Utilization, Net Pen, Labeo Rohita, Cirrhinus Mrigala, Cyprinus 

Carpio , Channa Striatus 

1 st Dr. Joycy Jay Manoharam 

2 nd S. Sujitha 





Research Scholar 




Abstract 

Fish is a delicious food in the world. Fresh water fishes were preferred by 

pupil of Thanjavur. They prefer live fishes for their food. Hence culturing 

them is a prestigious job in these areas. A study was made to get an insight 

about the quality of aquatic system and the food for the growth and 

utilization of common four different fishes, namely Labeo rohita (Rohu), 

Cirrhinus mrigala (Mrigal), Cyprinus carpio (mirror carp) and Channa 

striatus (Striped murrel). Under the vermicompost media fishes were 

provided with earthworms as food and were analyzed for growth. The 

results were discussed. 


Aquatic resources are inexhaustible. Man identified the aquatic environment as the 

alternative sources to exploit the resources and to produce more animal proteins. The 

aquatic community is the source of quality protein for human consumption and is threatened 

by the vast array of pollutants contaminating the ambience. Fertilizer application is also 

indispensable in the present scenario for the welfare of humans.Fish constitute an excellent, 

easily accessible source of quality protein and minerals for the rural population of our 

country. Intensive aqua farming and integrated farming practices can be an efficient way to 

. 



6271

ISSN: 2347-1697 




produce large quantities of protein rich food.Food is imperative for growth and utilization. 

Aquatic fauna live in water depends on the food that is available in water. Good quality 

and perfect quantity of food are primary factors that determine the growth of fishes 

and the cost of production in aquaculture utilized food is digested and assimilated for 

its maintenance and growth. Apart from providing energy, they play a vital role in the 

growth of aqua fauna. 

Enormous studies available on factors like quality of food (Baskaran et. al., 1990; 

Joycy Jay Manoharam, 1982; Swamy, Muralimohan and Ramamurthi, 1991; 

Elangumaran et.al., 1992; Ebanasar and Jayaprakas, 1994 and 1996; Anupriya, 2007), 

swimming activity (Arunachalam, Vivekanandan and pandian, 1976; Geetha, 2007 ), 

temperature (Jobling, 1981; Chanchal et.al., 1993); size of fish(Joycy Jay Manoharam 

1984; Devadoss, 1989; Marimuthu , pandian and Vivekanandan, 1976), dissolved 

oxygen (Vivekanandan and pandian 1977; Geetha, 2007) and hormones (Nirmala and 

pandian, 1983; Arul, 1986; Sambhu, 1996; Jayaprakas and Sindhu, 1996) are found 

to influence food consumption, growth and conversion efficiency of murrels. According 

to Joycy Jay Manoharam, (2008), super phosphate in low concentration act as a growth 

promoter. As these factors influences the growth and food utilization, an attempt was 

made to evaluate and compare the impact of vermicompost on four different fishes 

commonly utilized in Thanjavur area in the aquatic ecosystem. 

II. MATERIALS AND METHODS: 

Fishes used were, Labeo rohita (Rohu) I, Cirrhinus mrigala (Mrigal) II, Cyprinus carpio 

(mirror carp) III and Channa striatus (Striped murrel) IV. These fishes are highly priced all 

over India for their keeping quality, flavour, nutritive and recuperative values. 

Two ponds were selected and one was filled with bore water (control –C) and 

the other one was filled with water and vermicompost 1kg /100 liters (experimental –E). 

Quality of water was analyzed and then One day starvation was given after acclimatization. 

Net pens were prepared of size 1m ×1m ×1m and were divided into four compartments. 

Net cage. 

I 

IV 

II 

III 

Net pens were introduced two in each pond. Fifteen weighed Fishes per compartments were 

introduced as murrel, Rohu, Mrigal and Mirror carp (Table1). All fishes of one pen/ pond 

were kept as control and the other as experimental. All the fishes were fed ad libitum of 

earthworms as food. The unfed and faeces were collected every day. The experiment was 

conducted for a period of 21 days. 

After 21 days, the fishes were weighed and the sacrifice method of Maynard and 

Loosli (1962) was adopted for food utilization studies. 

Mean daily food intake = Feed given – Unfed collected 

Dr. Joycy Jay Manoharam, S. Sujitha :: Impact of Vermicompost 

on Food Utilization of some Fresh Water Fishes by Cage Culture 

Method 

6272

ISSN: 2347-1697 




III. GROWTH PARAMETERS 

Length and weight of fishes in all treatment were recorded on 20 th day. The growth 

parameters such as Growth, Growth rate and Percentage increase in body weight were 

calculated. 

IV. FOOD UTILIZATION 

The scheme of food utilization is expressed with the following modified formula 

(Pertursewiez and Macfutyen, 1970). The formula adapted in the present investigation was. 

C = P + M + F 

Where 

C = Food consumed 

P = Production or growth 

M = Metabolism energy lost due to respiration and 

Nitrogenous excretory product. 

F = Faeces produced 

Since V wasted energy and R respiration was estimated separately this work. 

V and R were expressed as metabolism (M). (Arunachalam and Palanichamy, 1982). 

V. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 

Feasible aquatic environment is a vital phenomenon for the growth and reproduction of 

aquatic organisms. Good quality and perfect quantity of food are primary factors that 

determine the growth of fishes. Quality of most of the fish is dependent on a number of 

factors, which includes the environment, food and availability. A favorite foodstuff for the 

majority of societies in the world is fish. Fish is consumed as a food by many species, 

including humans. Fishes are valuable sources of high grade protein and other organic 

products. 

Table 2: Showing growth parameters in four fishes in control and experimental conditions 

I II III IV 

Parameters C E C E C E C E 

Growth 16.51 16.04 3.85 3.92 0.66 0.57 4.04 5.41 

Specific Growth Rate 1.35 1.38 0.43 0.43 0.09 0.21 0.52 0.62 

% increase in body weight 1.09 1.07 0.25 0.25 0.04 0.03 0.26 0.35 

Feeding rate 4.13 4.48 1.45 1.42 0.818 0.63 1.05 1.36 

Food absorption 0.005 0.004 0.007 0.007 0.018 0.025 0.003 0.005 

Absorption Rate 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.19 0.13 0.12 0.19 0.19 

Absorption efficiency 0.19 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.7 1 0.3 0.3 

Metabolic rate 1.15 1.24 0.66 0.633 0.43 0.4 0.63 0.63 

Absorption efficiency 0.633 0.666 5.19 4.84 19.6 21.05 4.7 3.51 

Gross conversion efficiency 3302 4025 550 560 36.6 22.8 1346 1082 

They are most important source of animal protein and have been widely accepted as a good 

source of protein and other elements for the maintenance of healthy body. The result of this 



Method 

6273

ISSN: 2347-1697 




study shows the increased growth in two fishes. They are Labeo rohita (Rohu) and Channa 

striatus (Striped murrel) respectively. But when compared with Rohu, in channa there is a 

clear-cut difference between control and vermicompost environment. 

18 

EFFECT OF VERMICOMPOST ON GROWTH OF FISHES 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

CONTROL 

EXPERIMENTAL 

4 

2 

0 

ROHU MRIGAL CARPIO CHANNA 

. Figure 1: Effect of vermicompost on growth of four fishes 


Earthworms are easy to culture with much advantages, this would be alive and healthy diet 

for fishes. Food and the quality of aquatic system provides a conducive environment for 

cultivable fishes and gives a high price for them. The figure clearly reveals that with the 

vermicompost surrounding and earthworm diet gives a very pleasant environ for Channa 

than other fishes studied. Fishes prefer live food than other prepared food. Channa is a 

carnivorous fish and so it may prefer earthworm as a delicious diet. Mostly prepared diets 

were given for fishes in farms. Giving alive, protein rich diet would be a challenge for 

farmers in near future. Further it needs a clear study for the physiological and biochemical 

influence. 


[1] Anupriya,B. 2007. Food preference and utilization of Channa punctatus (Bloch). M.Sc. 

Dissertation. Bharathidason University. 

[2] Arunachalam and Palanichamy, 1982. Sublethal effects of carbaryl on surfacing behavior 

and food utilization studies in the air- breathing fish Macropodus cupanus. Physiol Beha.29; 

23 -27. 

[3] Ebanasar and Jayaprakas, 1994. Evaluation of different diets for the cage culture of Channa 

striatus. J. Inland Fish. Soc.India., 26(1); 59- 66. 



Method 

6274

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[4] Ebanasar and Jayaprakas, 1996. Food utilization of (Channidae: Pisces) fed three diets of 

animal origin. Indian JExp.Biol. 34: 1261 -1264. 

[5] Joycy Jay Manoharam, 1984. Effect of Body size on food utilization in a fish Macropodus 

cupanus.Indian J Anim.Res., 18(1): 57 – 60, 1984. 

[6] Joycy Jay Manoharam, 2008. Toxicity of phenol and super phosphate on digestive 

physiology of an air breathing fish Channa punctatus. Ph. D. thesis submitted to 

Bharathidason University, Tiruchirapalli. 

[7] Maynard,A.L and K.J. Loosli (1962)Animal nutrition, 5 TH Ed., Newyork. Mcgraw Hill,P 

533 


Manoharam, J.J. , Sujitha, S. (2017) :: “Impact of Vermicompost on Food 

Utilization of some Fresh Water Fishes by Cage Culture Method” International 


January 2017, pp. 6271-6275, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/039. 



Method 

6275

www.ijifr.com 



A Study of Effectiveness of Toolkit of Life 

Skill Education Programme on Visual-Spatial 

Intelligence of Secondary School Students 

Paper ID IJIFR/V4/ E5/ 041 Page No. 6276-6285 Subject Area Education 

Key Words 

Visual-Spatial Intelligence, Experimental & Control Groups, 1200 Students, 

South & Central Mumbai Secondary Schools , Purposive And Convenient 

Sampling Technique, Pre & Post Test Scores, Multiple-Intelligence Theory 

1 st Dr. (Mrs.) Mintu Sinha 

2 nd Dr. Bhagwan Balani 

Principal, 

Bombay Teachers’ Training College 



Bombay Teachers’ Training College 


Abstract 

Visual Spatial Intelligence makes it possible for people to perceive visual or spatial 

information, to transform this information, and to recreate visual images from 

memory. Well-developed spatial capacities are needed for the work of architects, 

sculptors, and engineers. Researchers were very keen to observe to study the 

effectiveness of toolkit of life skill education programme based toolkit on visualspatial 

intelligences among secondary school students. They used experimental 

method of research. The experiments were conducted in more than 20 secondary 

schools. Purposive and Convenient sampling technique has been used for drawing 

the sample. Secondary schools affiliated to SSC board were considered for the 

study. The project was carried out in English medium and co- education type of 

schools. It was found that, the mean of gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence of 

experimental group is significantly higher than that of control group. Hence it can 

be inferred that there is a significant difference in the gain scores of Visual-spatial 

intelligence of experimental and control groups. These findings indicate that the 

gain scores of experimental and control groups differ significantly. Therefore it 

was inferred that intervention programme organized has helped to develop 

Visual-spatial intelligence in the students of standard VIII of the experimental 

group. It was also inferred that the contribution of intervention of the educational 

programme (Toolkit) in the development of Visual-spatial intelligence is 14.05%. 

Thus it can be concluded that the intervention of the educational programme 

(Toolkit) has helped to enhance Visual-spatial intelligence among VIII standard 

students. 

. 



6276

ISSN: 2347-1697 





Gardner identifies eight intelligences, all of which he considers “part of our birthright.” 

However, he adds that “no two people have exactly the same intelligences in the same 

combination.” The eight intelligences are linguistic, logical, musical, spatial, bodily 

kinaesthetic, interpersonal, intrapersonal, and naturalistic. The extent to which the various 

intelligences develop depends, to a significant extent, on the individual’s education and 

culture. 

Gardner argues intelligence is categorized into three primary or overarching categories, 

those of which are formulated by the abilities. According to Gardner, intelligence is: 1) The 

ability to create an effective product or offer a service that is valued in a culture, 2) a set of 

skills that make it possible for a person to solve problems in life, and 3) the potential for 

finding or creating solutions for problems, which involves gathering new knowledge. 

Gardner, Howard (1997) wrote an article, “Multiple Intelligences as a Partner in School 

Improvement published in Educational leadership.” He added that it is difficult to grasp 

multiple-intelligences theory and implement its implications effectively. Multiple Intelligent 

theory is not a quick fix. However, educators who thoughtfully use the theory to support 

their larger educational goals find it a worthy partner in school improvement. The author has 

praised the efforts of several researchers and practitioners in this "Educational Leadership" 

issue and issues a special challenge to each of them. 

Visual Spatial Intelligence makes it possible for people to perceive visual or spatial 

information, to transform this information, and to recreate visual images from memory. 

Well-developed spatial capacities are needed for the work of architects, sculptors, and 

engineers. The students who turn first to the graphs, charts, and pictures in their textbook, 

who like to “web” their ideas before writing a paper, and who fill the blank space around 

their notes with intricate patterns are also using their spatial intelligence. While usually tied 

to the visual modality, spatial intelligence can also be exercised to a high level by 

individuals who are visually impaired. 

Christison, Mary Ann (1996) wrote an article that encourages using the seven intelligences-- 

verbal, musical, logical, spatial, kinaesthetic, interpersonal, and intrapersonal--in problem 

situations and focusing on the varied approach to learning fostered by these intelligences. 

His article also discusses a language classroom that helps develop a vision for expanding 

intelligent behavior and reinventing language learning. 

Silver, Harvey; Strong, Richard; Perini, Matthew (1997) inferred that Multiple-intelligences 

theory (MI) explores how cultures and disciplines shape human potential. Both MI and 

learning-style theories reject dominant ideologies of intelligence. Whereas learning styles 

are concerned with differences in the learning process, MI centres on learning content and 

Dr. (Mrs.) Mintu Sinha, Dr. Bhagwan Balani :: A Study of 

Effectiveness of Toolkit of Life Skill Education Programme on 

Visual-Spatial Intelligence of Secondary School Students 

6277

ISSN: 2347-1697 




products. Blending learning styles and MI theories via integrated intelligence menus may 

help minimize each theory's limitations and enhance its strengths. 

Greenhawk, Jan (1997), hired Specialists to help teachers develop standards for grading 

students' art work and oral presentations and to prepare students for state assessments, 

written descriptions often accompany students' chosen methods for displaying knowledge. It 

was observed in their research endeavour that in the five years since a Trappe, Maryland 

elementary school put Gardner's multiple-intelligences theory into practice; students' overall 

achievement and confidence have risen substantially. 

Toni Nobel (2004) combined the typologies of Multiple Intelligence theory and Revised 

Bloom’s Taxonomy. He observed that teachers gained an integrated model of the different 

ways that students learn in different intellectual domains and different thinking capabilities. 

Students’ greater understanding of their own and others’ learning and their motivation for 

learning during MI/RBT learning centre time illustrated ways their learning can be made 

more meaningful. 

R. Poornima, G.Lokanadha Reddy, (2011) focused on the Theory of Multiple Intelligence 

and its educational implications. This article explored the theory of MI (nature, criteria for 

recognition, key points of the theory and eight intelligences), describes the general teaching 

strategies practiced, barriers in implementing the MI in the classroom and ways and means 

to overcome those barriers. 

Mesut Tabuk,, Ahmet Şükrü Özdemir (2009) advocated the use of certain alternative 

teaching methods, including project based leaning and multiple intelligence approach. The 

emphasis throughout is on getting students to participate more, to interact more, and to 

broaden their perspective. The purpose of this research is to determine the effects of 

multiple intelligence approach in project based learning on the students’ mathematics 

achievements. 

Abdallah, Mahmoud Mohammad Sayed (2008) shaded some light on the history of MI 

Theory and the traditional IQ tests to clarify the rationale underlying this new theory. Then, 

it illustrates the initial seven intelligences that Gardener suggested (i.e. Verbal-linguistic 

intelligence, logical-mathematical intelligence, bodily-kinaesthetic intelligence, spatial 

intelligence, interpersonal intelligence, intrapersonal-reflective intelligence and musical 

intelligence). It goes on to highlight the educational applications and implications of MI 

Theory in English Language Teaching, with special focus on what has come to be called 

MI-Based Instruction. 

Williams, R. Bruce, (2007) focused on Multiple Intelligences for differentiated learning. 

There is an intricate literacy to Gardner's multiple intelligences theory that unlocks key 

entry points for differentiated learning. Using a well-articulated framework, rich with 

graphic representations, Williams provided a comprehensive discussion of multiple 

intelligences. He moved the teacher and students from curiosity to confidence and to 




6278

ISSN: 2347-1697 




competence in understanding and using the multiple intelligences theory in the most 

practical ways in curriculum, instruction and assessment. 

Micheal M, (2005), carried out a study to explore the assessment practice in “A level 

secondary schools with the major focus on Continuous Assessment Strategies. The findings 

of the study revealed that: Numerous Continuous Assessment Strategies (i.e. the written 

tests, recap exercises, take-home assignments, check lists, observation, presentations and 

projects) were being used in A level secondary schools. A positive relationship was 

observed between some of the continuous assessment strategies used and students’ 

performance. 

Based on the above review of related literature, the researchers found that none of the above 

researchers have made an attempt for development of multiple intelligences, hence were 

keen to undertake an experimental study to measure the effect of life skill education 

programme on Visual-spatial intelligence of secondary school students. Amstrong Thomas 

(1999) in his book have defined Visual Spatial Intelligence that involves thinking in pictures 

and images and the ability to perceive, transform, and recreate different aspects of the 

visual-spatial world. As such it is the playground of architects, photographers, artists, pilots, 

and mechanical engineers. Whoever designed the Pyramids in Egypt had a lot of this 

intelligence. So too did individuals like Thomas Edison, Pablo Picasso, and Ansel Adams. 

Highly spatial individuals often have an acute sensitivity to visual details and can visualize 

vividly, draw or sketch their ideas graphically, and orient themselves in three-dimensional 

space with ease. Lazear, D. G. (1994) in his book, “pathway of learning, teaching students 

and parent about multiple intelligences” a process of knowing that occurs through seeing 

both externally (with the physical eyes) and internally (with the mind’s eye). It uses such 

tools as drawing, painting sculpture, collage, montage, visualization, imagination, 

pretending, and creating mental images. Bruce Campbell (2008) in his book, “Handbook of 

Differentiated Instruction Using the Multiple Intelligences Lesson Plans & More” describes 

visual spatial intelligence as the ability to think in three dimensions. Core capacities of this 

intelligence include mental imagery, spatial reasoning, image manipulation, graphic and 

artistic skills, and an active imagination. Sailors, pilots, sculptors, painters, and architects all 

exhibit spatial intelligence. Researchers also were very keen to observe to study the effect of 

effectiveness of co scholastic based toolkit on visual-spatial intelligences among secondary 

school students. The aim, objectives and research design of the study employed for the same 

is described as under: 

1.1 Aim of the study 

To study the effectiveness of toolkit of life skill education programme on Visual-spatial 

intelligence of secondary school students. 

1.2 Objectives of the study 

i.) To study the effectiveness of toolkit of life skill education programme on Visual-spatial 

intelligence of secondary school students. 

ii.) To compare the pre and post test scores of Visual-spatial intelligence for experimental 

and control groups. 




6279

ISSN: 2347-1697 




iii.) To compare the gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence test for experimental and 

control groups. 

iv.) To measure the proportion of variance in gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence Due 

to intervention of the educational programme (Toolkit) 

1.3 Hypothesis of the study 

There is no significant difference in pre and post test scores of Visual-spatial intelligence for 

experimental and control groups. 

II. RESEARCH DESIGN 

For the present study, the researchers have used the experimental research approach. The 

present study focuses on establishing the cause-effect relationship between the independent 

variable and the dependant variable. The cause, independent variable is ‘Toolkit’ and the 

dependant variable is the Visual-spatial intelligence. Therefore the researcher used the 

Quasi-Experimental Pretest - posttest Non-equivalent group design. 

i.) Sampling: For the present experimental study, the eight standard students has been 

selected and considered for the study. The sample of study has been 1200 students 

studying in secondary schools of South and Central Mumbai. 

ii.) Sampling Technique: Purposive and Convenient sampling technique has been used for 

drawing the sample. Secondary schools affiliated to SSC board have been considered 

for the study. The project was implemented in English medium and co- education type 

schools only. 

iii.) Treatment: The comprehensive developed toolkit has been designed that comprises 

teaching and learning activities to extend Gardner’s theory to effective classroom 

practice. The newly developed toolkit comprises 15 comprehensive student centric 

educational activities based on the implications of multiple-intelligence theory that has 

stimulated student teachers to find more ways of helping all students in their classes. 

The specially designed workshops has been organised by student teachers in secondary 

schools of South and Central Mumbai. 

iv.) Tools of the Study: The tool has been constructed to measure Visual-spatial 

intelligence of experimental and control groups before and after the treatment. The data 

has been collected from eight standard secondary school students of 20 schools. The 

researchers have constructed and standardised tool to measure the Visual-spatial 

intelligence of VIII standard students with the help of experts and has established the 

validity and reliability of the tool. 

v.) Data Collection: Data has been collected from the experimental and control groups. 

The data was collected in two phases one in the beginning of the study as pretest scores 

and two at the end of the treatment as posttest scores. 

III. ANALYSIS OF DATA 

Analysis is critical for the process of research. Analysis is a form of description of data 

gathered in a systematic and scientific way. Statistical analysis acts as a quantitative link for 

the communication of result. The data collected has been scored and compiled to 




6280

ISSN: 2347-1697 




appropriate statistical tests to test the hypotheses formulated. The data has been analyzed 

using descriptive and inferential statistics. 

Descriptive analyses: Describes what applies to the data and helps the researchers 

have drawn conclusions and have generalized to sample of the population. Mean 

scores of the each were calculated and were compiled for the purpose of the further 

data analysis. 

Inferential Analysis: Research has no meaning unless it draws inferences for the 

characteristics of the population. Inferential analysis helps to extend the 

generalization to the entire population from which the sample is drawn. The 

inferential techniques for testing the hypotheses in the study will be used such as t- 

tests, two way anova, t- ratio and ω 2 estimate values. 

IV. TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 

H1: There is no significant difference in pre and post test scores of Visual-spatial 

intelligence for experimental and control groups. 

a. There is no significant difference in pre and post test scores of Visual-spatial 

intelligence for experimental group. 

Variables: Pre and post test scores of Visual-spatial intelligence 

Groups: Experimental Group 

b. There is no significant difference in pre and post test scores of Visual-spatial 

intelligence for control group. 

Variables: Pre and post test scores of Visual-spatial intelligence 

Groups: Control Group 

Table 1: Difference in Pre and Post Test Scores of Visual-spatial intelligence for Experimental 

and Control Groups 

Group Variable Test N df Mean SD t-ratio Level of significance 

Visual 

Spatial 

Intelligence 

Experimental 

Control 

Pre-test 

31.21 4.07 

20 38 

Post-test 36.55 3.86 

Pre-test 

32.08 2.98 

Post-test 

20 38 

33.77 3.94 

4.26 Significant at 0.01 Level 

1.53 

Not Significant at 0.05 

Level 

Table 2: With the given Mean, S.D. and p values, calculation of the t-ratio and determination 

of significance difference between the tests 

Group Tests N Mean S.D t- p Level of significance 

ratios values 

Experimental Pretest 31.21 4.07 

Significant at 0.01 Level 

20 

4.26 0.134 

Not 

Significant at 0.05 Level 




6281

ISSN: 2347-1697 




EG: N=20, df (N-1) =39, tabulated’ values at 0.05 = 2.026 and 0.01 = 2.64 

CG: N= 20, df (N-1) =39, tabulated’ values at 0.05 = 2.026 and 0.01 = 2.68. 

Findings: 

Experimental group: t-ratios are significant (t = 4.26) and p < 0.05, therefore the null 

hypothesis is rejected. 

Control group: - t-ratios are significant (t = 1.53) and p > 0.05, therefore the null 

hypothesis is accepted. 

H2: There is no significant difference in the gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence test 

for experimental and control groups. 

Variables: Gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence 

Groups: Experimental and Control Groups 

Table 3: Calculation of Gain scores 

Gain score= post test scores -pre test scores 

Differences in Gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence Test for Experimental and 

Control Groups 

Variable Groups N 

Visualspatial 

intelligence 

Pre 

Test 

Scores 

Post 

Test 

Scores 

Gain 

scores 

Gain 

score 

SD 

Experimental 20 31.21 36.55 5.35 5.10 

Control 20 32.08 33.77 1.69 3.87 

t-ratio Level of significance 

2.5567 

Significant at 0.05 

Level 

Observations: 

P value and statistical significance: 

The two-tailed P value equals 0.0147 

By conventional criteria, this difference is considered to be statistically significant. 

Confidence interval: 

The mean of Group One minus Group Two equals 3.6600 

95% confidence interval of this difference: From 0.7620 to 6.5580 

Intermediate values used in calculations: 

t = 2.5567 

df = 38 

standard error of difference = 1.432 

Results 

• From the table, it is seen that for gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence of 

experimental and control groups the obtained t- ratio is significant at 0.05 level. 

• The mean of gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence of experimental group is 

significantly higher than that of control group. 

• Hence it can be inferred that there is a significant difference in the gain scores of 

Visual-spatial intelligence of experimental and control groups. 




6282

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Interpretation 

These findings indicate that the gain scores of experimental and control groups differ 

significantly. It can thus be inferred that intervention programme organized has helped to 

develop Visual-spatial intelligence in the students of standard VIII of the experimental 

group. 

ω 2 – estimate 

• Since t-ratios of gain scores for Visual-spatial intelligence are not found to be significant 

hence ω 2 estimate values are computed using the formula. 

Table 4 : ω 2 - estimate for Visual-spatial intelligence of X standard students 

t-ratio of 

Variable 

ω 2 est 100 ω 2 

Gain scores 

Verbal-linguistic intelligence 2.5567 0.1405 14.05% 

From table 4, it can be said that the ω 2 estimate on variable Visual-spatial intelligence is 

14.05%. 

Proportion of Variance in Gain Scores of 

Visual-spatial intelligence 

14% 

1 2 

86% 

Figure1: Pie Chart of Proportion of Variance in Gain Scores of Visual-spatial intelligence Due 

to intervention of the educational programme (Toolkit) 

Figure1 describes the Pie Chart of Proportion of Variance in Gain Scores of Visual-spatial 

intelligence Due to intervention of the educational programme (Toolkit). From the figure it 

can be inferred that the contribution of intervention of the educational programme (Toolkit) 

in the development of Visual-spatial intelligence is 14.05%. Thus it can be concluded that 

the intervention of the educational programme (Toolkit) has helped to enhance Visualspatial 

intelligence among VIII standard students. 




6283

ISSN: 2347-1697 




V. CONCLUSION & FINAL OUTCOMES OF THE STUDY 

The mean of gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence of experimental group is significantly 

higher than that of control group. Hence it can be inferred that there is a significant 

difference in the gain scores of Visual-spatial intelligence of experimental and control 

groups. These findings indicate that the gain scores of experimental and control groups 

differ significantly. It can thus be inferred that intervention programme organized has 

helped to develop Visual-spatial intelligence in the students of standard VIII of the 

experimental group. It can be inferred that the contribution of intervention of the educational 

programme (Toolkit) in the development of Visual-spatial intelligence is 14.05%. Thus it 

can be concluded that the intervention of the educational programme (Toolkit) has helped to 

enhance Visual-spatial intelligence among VIII standard students. 

If we compare findings of this research with that of other researchers observations, Harward 

Gardner proponent of multiple intelligence theory has praised the efforts of several 

researchers and practitioners in "Educational Leadership" issue and issues a special 

challenge to each of them. The researchers believe that it is indeed a challenging task to 

enhance the multiple intelligences of students. The result of this research confirms the 

development of Visual-spatial intelligence 14.05%. It can be concluded that educational 

practitioner need to take many more professional endeavours to develop multiple 

intelligences of students. 

VI. REFERENCES 

[1] Amstrong Thomas (1999) 7 Kinds of Smart: Identifying and Developing Your Multiple 

Intelligences, Plume, Penguin Books Ltd. USA, page no.10. 

[2] Bruce Campbell (2008). Handbook of Differentiated Instruction Using the Multiple 

Intelligences Lesson Plans & More, Pearson Education, Inc, USA 

[3] Christison, M. A. (1996). Teaching and Learning Languages through Multiple 

Intelligences. Tesol Journal, 6(1), 10-14. 

[4] Gardner, H. (1997). Multiple Intelligences as a Partner in School Improvement. Educational 

leadership, 55(1), 20-21. 

[5] Greenhawk, J. (1997). Multiple intelligences meet standards. Educational Leadership, 55(1), 

62-64. 

[6] Lazear, D. G. (1994). Seven pathways of learning: Teaching students and parents about 

multiple intelligences. Zephyr PressLearning Materials. Page no.7 

[7] Mwebaza, m. (2010). Continuous assessment and students‟ performance in „a‟ (doctoral 

dissertation, makerere university kampala). 

[8] Noble, T. (2004). Integrating the revised Bloom's taxonomy with multiple intelligences: A 

planning tool for curriculum differentiation. Teachers College Record, 106(1), 193-211. 

[9] Silver, H., Strong, R., & Perini, M. (1997). Integrating Learning Styles and Multiple 

Intelligences. Educational Leadership, 55(1), 22-27. 

[10] Williams, R. Bruce (2007). Multiple Intelligences for Differentiated Learning ERIC No 

(ED497234). 

[11] Yaklaşımının, P. T. Ö. Ç. Z., & Öğrenme, M. (2010). The effects of multiple intelligence 

approach in project based learning on Mathematics achievement. 




6284

AUTHOR’S BIOGRAPHY 

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Dr. (Mrs.) Mintu Sinha is the Principal of Bombay Teachers’ Training 

College since the year 2004. Dr. Sinha is a double post-graduate in political 

science and education, and a double Ph.D. as well, a unique achievement 

even amongst the teacher educators. She has also done a certificate course in 

Educational Leadership at the University of West Georgia, U.S.A. Moreover 

she has delivered lectures and presented research based paper at various 

conferences in India and abroad. She has been actively involved in improving 

quality and the standard of education in Mumbai University as the 

Chairperson, Board of Studies in Education; Member Academic Council; 

Member, Research and Recognition Committee; Member, Local Inspection 

Committee etc. She is a member of National Assessment and Accreditation Committee (NAAC), 

which evaluates the academic performance of Colleges of Education in India. Dr. Sinha is a 

recognized Ph.D. guide. She believes that quality and contents of Teacher education must be the 

focus of any thrust for improvement in the field of education. To this end, she has been thriving 

through various platforms and her efforts have brought many accolades to her college. 

Dr. Bhagwan Balani is working as Assistant Professor at Bombay 

Teachers’ Training College since 2004. He has done his doctorate 

degree on developing a quality assurance model of teacher education 

programme. He has presented research based paper at various 

conferences in India. He has got the recognition as Teacher of the 

University (Post Graduate Teaching) for M. Ed. & M. A. Degree 

(by papers) in Education. 


Sinha, M. , Balani, B. (2017) :: “A Study of Effectiveness of Toolkit of Life Skill 

Education Programme on Visual-Spatial Intelligence of Secondary School Students” 

International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347-1697), Vol. 4 

No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6276-6285, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/041. 




6285

www.ijifr.com 



Smart Automated Water Distribution System 

using PLC 


Key Words 

PLC, Solenoid valve, Level Switch, GSM Module 

Elec. & 

Telecomm. 

Engg. 

1 st Ashitosh A. Salunkhe 

2 nd Dhiraj D. Pawar 

3 rd Ashwini L. Patil 

4 th Snehal B. Pawar 


Department of Elec. & Telecomm. Engg. 

Nanasaheb Mahadik College of Engineering 

Walwa, Sangli-Maharashtra 

Abstract 

This proposed “Smart Automated Water Distribution System” is used to distribute 

water equally. Automation provides optimized solution for all problems of 

distribution of water and maintenance of system. The proposed system can be use 

where the supply of water takes place by water tankers such as college hostels, big 

apartments and industrial areas. The paper highlights all aspects of this subject 

and it will give a reliable and efficient technique for water distribution .This 

system consist of PLC, GSM module and solenoid valve. PLC can control 

distribution of water by opening and closing solenoid valve according to output 

comes from level switch.. 


In order to make water distribution more efficiently by reducing wastage of water and power 

this proposal made. With the continuous economic growth, the water demand of industries, 

enterprises is also increasing. The water wastage is due to many reasons such as leakage, 

mankind laziness and operator error. It improves the performance and also reduces human 

efforts hence we are going to implement PLC based water distribution system. The present 

system leads to wastage of water and due to improper handling water is not properly 

distributed to end user. Here we are working on the distribution of water in college hostels, 

industrial areas where water is supplied by tankers it monitors all the water equally to all the 

areas of college hostels depending upon the amounts of water in the main tank. All these 

tasks are monitored through system with the programmable logic controller (PLC).The use 

. 



6286

ISSN: 2347-1697 




of water diversity increases because of restriction imposed by the water availability, storage 

capability of tank, control and process parameters. 

II. EXISTING SYSTEM 

In previous method, person in charge will go to that place and open the valve for a particular 

time period. Once the time over again the in charge person will go to the same place and 

close the valve. It is wastage of time .The water wastages such as leakages, mankind 

laziness and operating error can be occurred. The water distribution with RTC using 

microcontroller has several disadvantages like water theft. Due to this many people will not 

receive sufficient water for their use.[3] 

III. METHODOLOGY 

The system which is shown in below gives the automatic implantation in water supply 

control for drinking water. Programmable logic controller is the heart of automated water 

supply system. The functional diagram of system gives the whole idea of system. In this 

system we are controlling valve by observing the level of water tank. PLC programming is 

done using ladder diagram language. 

IV. PROPOSED SYSTEM 

Figure 1: Proposed Block Diagram 

Ashitosh A. Salunkhe, Dhiraj D. Pawar, Ashwini L. Patil, Snehal 

B. Pawar :: Smart Automated Water Distribution System using 

PLC 

6287

ISSN: 2347-1697 




System Description 

Pumping section is connected to PLC. If the water level below the set point the pump is 

automatically on with the help of PLC. Checking the level in storage tank is the first process 

.If the level attains the set point overall system is started. The water is flow through the 

pump when the main solenoid valve opens. When level of main tank becomes low then 

GSM will be activated and sends message to supplier. The respective areas can get water 

until the set point reaches. 

PLC 

PLC is a main controller which takes input from data logger and passes this 

information to the respective engineer. All the inputs from level sensor are given to 

PLC. The PLC is main controller used for storing these all information and 

controlling purpose. The output from PLC in the range of 24V DC. [2] 

Level switch 

Level switch can be used for sense the amount of water level present in the storage 

tank. 24V DC supply is given to the water. The buzzer indicator will connect to the 

level switch. It will then connect to the PLC.[4] 

Solenoid valve 

Solenoid valve is a two port valve. It will be used to turn on and off condition. In this 

project three solenoid valves will be used. 230V supply is given to the main solenoid 

valve. PLC output is connected to the solenoid valve with the help of RS232 

cable.[1] 

GSM 

GSM (global system for mobile) is a TDMA based wireless network technology 

developed in Europe that is used throughout most of the world. GSM phones make 

use of a SIM card to identify the users account.[2] 

Field Section 

Figure 2: Field Section required for implementation of this work. 



PLC 

6288

ISSN: 2347-1697 




V. CONCLUSION 

The automation for water distribution system eliminates water wastage. This system 

provides features such as, the quantity of water and time scheduling is achieved without 

interruption. Distributed system is intelligences it monitoring all time without man power. 

With the help of PLC we can cover larger area of distribution, because it handles thousands 

of inputs and outputs. The automated system is full-proof system where it will control water 

wastage as well as shortage .It immediate sends message to supplier. So this project will 

become an optimized solution for distribution at college and big apartments. 


[1] T. Baranidharan, A.Chinnadurai, R.M.Gowri, J. Karthikeyan.” Automated water distribution 

system using PLC & SCADA”. International Journal of Electrical and Electronics 

Engineers, IJEEE, Volume 07, Issue 01, Jan- June 2015. 

[2] J.P. Shridharanyaa, Jagadeesan .A, &Lavanya. A; “Theft Identification and Automated 

Water Supply System Using Embedded Technology”, International Journal of Advanced 

Research in Electrical, Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering, Vol.2, and pp: 1-7, 

2013. 

[3] Bhawarkr.N.B, Pande.D.P, Sonone.R.S, and Pandit.P.A&Patil.P.D; “Literature Review for 

Automated Water Supply with Monitoring the Performance System”, International Journal 

of Current Engineering and Technology, Vol.4, pp: 1-4, 2014. 

[4] PratikshaHattikatti, SavitaKarwande, Poonam S. Rode Mrunalini Bhandarkar.” PLC 

Controlled Water Distribution System”. International Journal of Electrical and Electronics 

Engineers, IJEEE, Vol. 4, Issue 5, May 2015. 


Salunkhe, A.A., Pawar, D.D., Patil, L.A., Pawar, B.S. (2017) :: “Smart Automated 

Water Distribution System using PLC” International Journal of Informative & 

Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347-1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6286-6289, 

Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/051 



PLC 

6289

www.ijifr.com 



Experimental Study on Partial Replacement 

of Cement by Coconut Shell Ash for Normal 

and High Strength Concrete 

Civil 


Engineering 

Coconut Shell Ash, Ordinary Portland Cement, Split Tensile Strength, 

Key Words 

Compressive Strength For M20 & M40 Grade Concrete 

1 st Vijaya Kumar Y.M. 

2 nd Deepika R. 


Department of Civil Engineering 



M.Tech. (Structural Engineering) Student 

Department of Civil Engineering 



Abstract 

Concrete is widely used in the various construction field, due to its durability and 

less maintenance when compare to the other type of construction materials. From 

year by year there is an increase in the population growth and other social 

activities. So obviously there is an increase in the production of cement. During the 

production of cement, it emits the large quantity of co2 to the atmosphere. These 

cause the green house effect, as the population increase, the industrial waste or 

secondary bi-product increase. One of the most difficult tasks is to managing these 

products are to reduce or minimize. For these 2 reasons, scientists always search 

for an alternate binding materials either fully or partial replacement of cement. 

Some of are coconut shell, babbage ash, rice-husk, lime, silica etc. Coconut shell is 

the one of the agricultural waste product. By using these, we can readily reduce 

the usage of cement and green house effect. In this project, coconut shell is used. 

Coconut shell should be burnt in a controlled temperature of 700 degree for 5 

hour. Then the ash should be sieved in 90µ. Concrete cube and cylinder are casted 

and immersed in water for various percentages of 0, 5, 10, 15 and 20% 

respectively. The optimum 28 days compressive and split tensile strength for M20 

grade concrete is 27.92 N/mm2 and 2.73 N/mm2 at 10% replacement of OPC-CSA. 

The optimum 28 days compressive and split tensile strength for M40 grade 

concrete is 38.01 N/mm2 and 3.83 N/mm2 at 10% replacement of OPC-CSA. 

Coconut shell ash is used as a fractional substitute of cement. 

. 



6290

ISSN: 2347-1697 





Cement is the one of the greatest building material and maximum extensively used material 

throughout the biosphere in the various field. Concrete which is basically consists of 

cement, aggregate, water and admixture. Due to the development of the world these 

constituents’ materials, have been changed in part to the technology development and 

economic growth. The usage of concrete has become increased day by day randomly; there 

is an increase in the production of cement. For every 1000 kg production of cement, it 

releases 1000 kg of co 2 to the atmosphere. It causes the green house effect. Apart from all 

other construction materials, cement gives the maximum strength to the structure. 

Coconut is also referred as “king of tropical plants” and “man useful tree”. The scientific 

name of coconut is “cocos nucifera”. It ia an tall cylindrical stalked palm tree reaching about 

30-35m in height and 110-140m in radius. It can be easily cultivate, where the soil rich in 

calcium and phosphorous. In India this type of soil is available in Kerala, Andhra Pardesh, 

TamilNadu. The chemical composition of coconut shell is same as the cement composition. 

It contains Sio 2 (9.57%), Cao(1.03%), Mgo(0.34%), Al 2 O 3 +Fe 2 O 3 (4.61%), Na 2 O(0.64%). 

Therefore it is a feasibility of utilization of coconut shell ash as a replacement of cement in 

producing concrete. 

The aim of this study is to determine the optimum dosage as a replacement of cement by 

CSA for normal and high strength concrete that will give the required compressive and split 

tensile strength at various percentage of CSA-OPC. 

Figure 1: Coconut with the husk being removed 

II. LITERATURE REVIEW 

i.) Utsev J.K, Taku J.K “Experimental study on partial replacement of cement 

with coconut shell ash in concrete” (2012). 

‣ He determined the mix proportion ratio as 1:2:4 with the w/c 0.5. 

‣ The final and initial setting time is well within the range of BSI2(1978). 

‣ The density and compression strength is decrease as the percentage increase, due to 

decrease in the pozzolanic activity. 

‣ The optimum 28 days compressive strength is 31.78 N/mm 2 at 10% replacement of 

CSA. 

Vijaya Kumar Y.M. , Deepika R. :: Experimental Study on Partial 

Replacement of Cement by Coconut Shell Ash for Normal and 

High Strength Concrete 

6291

ISSN: 2347-1697 




ii.) P.E Imoisil, C.M. Ibegbulam, T.I Adejube “ Effect of concentration of coconut 

shell ash on the tensile properties of epoxy composite” (2012). 

‣ The micro hardness and modulus increases as the percentage of filler material 

increase. 

‣ The tensile strength is increase from 5 to 15%, then it is decreases as the amount of 

filler material increase. 

‣ He concludes that the 15% of the filler material is good for the construction work. 

iii.) A.A Raheem, B.S Olaaunkanmi and C.S Folorunso “ Saw dust ash as a partial 

replacement for cement on concrete” (2012). 

‣ The slump and compaction factor decrease with increase in the percentage of SDA. 

‣ Specific gravity of SDA is lesser than the cement. 

‣ Concrete become less workable, as the amount of SDA increase. So more water is 

required for the concrete to be effective. 

‣ The compressive strength increase, as the curing days increases. 

‣ He concluded that 5% of SDA is good for the maximum strength. 

iv.) Vignesh Kumar nNagarajan, S. Arundevi, S.P Manohari and M. Maria santha 

“Experimental study on partial replacement of cement with coconut shell ash in 

concrete” (2014). 

‣ He finds out the composition of CSA and compare with the composition of cement. 

‣ The initial and final setting time is increases, as the percentage increases 

‣ The compressive strength of the mortar decreases, as the percentage of CSA 

increases. 

‣ The optimum 28 days compressive strength is 31.78 N/mm 2 at 10% replacement of 

OPC-CSA. 

v.) Arathy V.B, Chirtina jery “Effect of coconut shell powder on the strength of 

soil” (2015). 

‣ The maximum dry density is at 1% of CSP added to the soil. 

‣ The minimum OMC is at 2% of CSP. 

‣ The maximum CBR value is at 2% of CSP. 

‣ He concluded that 2% of CSP can be readily used to increases strength of the soil. 

III. MATERIALS AND METHODS 

Throughout the project UltraTech OPC 43 grade cement is used, fine aggregate which is 

locally available and river sand and which is confirming to zone –II of IS 383-1970. The quarried 

and crushed granites stones are used as a coarse aggregate. The aggregate which are retained on 

4.75mm IS sieve. Water is from the civil engineering department of A.I.T college chikamagalur. It 

should be free from the impurities like acids, alkalies etc... Super-plasticizer of SP-430 is used and it 

is confirmed to IS 9103-1999. 

IV. PROCESSING OF COCONUT SHELL ASH 

Around 3000 coconuts half shell were collected from the home and as well as from 

the surrounding of home & kept in the sun-dried for 2 days. The inner portion of the meat 




6292

ISSN: 2347-1697 




were removed and cleaned by using knives. The outer portion of the fiber were scarped and 

cleaned with emery paper. The cleaned coconut shell were cut into the small pieces of size 

dimension 2 sq.m approximately by using hammer and were kept in a stainless steel 

container. The steel container was kept in the muffle furnace with a 700 degree temperature 

for the carbonization process. (Carbonization is a process for the production of charred 

carbon from the source material with a limited supply of air or absences to the temperature 

with an sufficiently high to dried up the sources material and produce the carbonaceous 

material). After a soaking time for 5 hours the sample gets carbonized. This carbonized 

sample is allowed to cool for some hour. Then the powders were sieved in the 90µm. 

Figure 2: Coconut shell ash 

The mix design ratio for M 20 grade concrete is 1:1.86:3.04 with w/c 0.5 and for M 40 grade 

concrete is 1:1.5:2.83 with w/c 0.35. Then add the CSA at various percentages (0, 5, 10, 15 

and 20% respectively) for both the M 20 and M 40 grade concrete. Mix all the ingredients 

along with the water. After mixing pour the concrete to the cube and cylinder. Leave it for 

24 hours to get hardened properties for the concrete. Then remove the specimen from the 

mould and leave it for some hour. Then the specimen is immersed in water for curing. The 

compressive and split tensile strength is find out at 7 and 28 days. 

V. RESULT AND DISCUSSION 

The mechanical properties of the concrete is the compressive strength, here the compression 

strength of concrete is conducted at various percentage of the coconut shell ash is added to 

the concrete. The compression strength is decrease as the percentage of coconut shell ash 

increases in the concrete for both the M 20 and M 40 grade concrete, due to decreases in the 

pozzolanic activity. 

Table 1: Compression strength for NSC and HSC: 

Normal Strength Concrete 

Percentage of 

CSA 


N/mm 2 

N/mm 2 

7 days 28 days 7 days 28 days 

0 23.76 31.61 35.64 49.24 

5 21.86 28.4 29.3 43.3 

10 20.6 27.92 24.07 38.01 

15 17.56 22.03 18.80 32.13 

20 14.3 17.71 12.08 25.1 




6293

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Table 2: Split Tensile Strength for NSC and HSC 

Percentage of 

CSA 

Normal Strength Concrete 

N/mm 2 


N/mm 2 

7 days 28 days 7 days 28 days 

0 3.68 4.09 3.50 4.85 

5 2.83 3.33 2.91 4.28 

10 2.26 2.73 2.42 3.83 

15 1.76 2.26 1.88 3.18 

20 0.8 1.03 1.44 2.55 

Tensile strength for NSC 

Compressive strength for NSC 

N/mm 2 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

0 

0% 5% 10% 15% 20% 

Percentage of CSA added 

7 days 

28 days 

N/mm 2 

35 

30 

25 

20 

15 

10 

5 

0 

0% 

5% 

10% 

15% 

20% 

Percentages of CSA added 

7 days 

28 days 

Graph 1 and 2: Compressive Strength for Normal and High strength Concrete 

Compressive strength for HSC 

Tensile strength for HSC 

60 

6 

N/mm 2 

40 

20 

0 

0% 

5% 

10% 

15% 

20% 


7 days 

28 days 

N/mm 2 

4 

2 

0 

0% 5% 10% 15% 20% 


7 days 

28 days 

Graph 3 and 4: Split Tensile Strength for Normal and High Strength Concrete. 

From table 1 and graph 1,2, the optimum 28 days compressive strength for M 20 and M 40 

grade concrete is 27.92 N/mm 2 and 38.01 N/mm 2 at 10% replacement of OPC-CSA.Split 

tensile strength of the concrete is difficult to measure directly, it can be measured indirectly 

by keeping the cylinder horizontally and applying the compressive load which gives split 

tensile strength. Tensile strength is decreases as the percentage of replacement of CSA 

increases. From table 2 and graph 3,4, the optimum 28 days tensile strength for M 20 and 

M 40 grade concrete is 2.73 N/mm 2 and 3.83 N/mm 2 at 10% replacement of OPC-CSA. 




6294

ISSN: 2347-1697 





From above experimental work, we conclude that, the compressive and split tensile strength 

decreases with increases the percentage of CSA for both M 20 and M 40 grade concrete. 

Because at the early stage the pozzolanic activity will be very low, so obviously the strength 

decreases. But at the later stage the pozzolanic activity increases, so the strength will be 

increases. So this type of concrete is used in the pre-cast construction, road work etc...As we 

observed in the above experimental result, the optimum percentage of CSA added to the 

concrete at 10% by the weight of cement for both M 20 and M 40 grade concrete. 

VII. REFERENCE 

[1] Vigensh Kumar, Nagarajan, S. Aruna Devi etal…“Experimentalstudy on partial replacement of 

cement with coconut shell ash in concrete”. International journal of science and research, 

volume 3, issue 3, March 2014, Page no..651-661. 

[2] Utsev J.K, Taku J.K “ Coconut shell as partial replacement of ordinary portland cement in 

concrete production”. International journal of scientific and technology research, volume 1, issue 

8, September 2012, Page no…86-89. 

[3] P.E Imoisili, C.M Ibegbulam and T.I Adejugbe“ Effect of concentration of coconut shell ash on 

the tensile properties of epoxy composites”, Pacific journal of science and technology, volume 

12, issue1, May 2012, Page no…463-468. 

[4] A.A Raheem, B.S Olasumkanmi“ Saw dust ash as partial replacement for cement in concrete”. 

Organisation, technology and management in construction an international journal, 

DOI10.5592/otml 3.2.2012. 

[5] Code book IS 10262:2009, IS 8112-1989, IS 383-1970. 

[6] Concrete Technogoly text book “ M.Sshetty”. 

[7] IS: 8112-1389 Specification for 43grade Ordinary Portland cement, Bureau of Indian Standard, 

New Delhi. 

[8] P.B. Madakson, D.S Yawas and A. Apasi“Characterization of coconut shell ash for Potential 

Utilization in Metal Matrix Composites for Automotive Application”. International journal of 

Engineering Science and Technology (IJEST), volume 4, issue 3, March 2012. 

[9] P. Asha, A. Salman, R. Arun Kumar “Experimental Study on Concrete with Bamboo LeafAsh”. 

IJEAT, volume 3, issue 6, August 2014, page no…46-51. 

Author’s Biographies 

Mr. Vijay Kumar Y.M was born on 1984 in Mandya, Karnataka. He 

receives his Bachelor of Engineering degree in Civil Engineering from 

PES college of Engineering, Mandya, Karnataka in the year 2006 and 

Master degree in CAD Structure from PES college of Engineering 

Mandya, Karnataka in the year 2008. At the present he is working as 

Assistant Professor in Adichunchanagiri Institute of Technology, 

Chickmagalur, Karnataka. 

Ms. Deepika R was born in 1991 in Bhadravathi, Karnataka. She 

receives her Bachelor of Engineering degree in Civil Engineering from 

Adichunchanagiri Institute of Technology, Chickmagalur, Karnataka 

from in 2013. At present she is Final year student of Master’s degree in 

Structural Engineering from Adichunchanagiri Institute of Technology, 

Chickmagalur, Karnataka under VTU. 




6295


ISSN: 2347-1697 




Vijaya Kumar, Y.M. , Deepika, R. (2017) :: “Experimental Study on Partial 

Replacement of Cement by Coconut Shell Ash for Normal and High Strength 

Concrete” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347- 

1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6290-6296, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/057 




6296

www.ijifr.com 




Paper ID IJIFR/V4/ E5/ 059 Page No. 6297-6320 Subject Area MBA Tech. 

Key Words 

Banking, Robotics, Locker, Smart Vault 

1 st Dr. Anuja Agarwal 

2 nd Rohan Arora MBA Tech. Student 

3 rd Kriti Dua 

4 th Meryl Cherian 

Associate Dean, 

Mukesh Patel School of Technology, Management 

and Engineering , SVKM’s NMIMS University 





Abstract 

While instant banking has carved a comfortable space for the urban user, 

the next game changer with higher speed, reduced cost, expanded skill set, 

increased productivity, 24*7 services and improved customer experience 

would be robotic technology making a mark in the banking sector in the 

coming decades. This research paper helps in understanding the scope of 

roles & services provided by robots in the future of banking. Within 

banking, where data drives decision-making, reporting and customer 

communication, robots are altering the way business is getting done. Based 

on a combination of large scale data repositories & cognitive computing 

robots can be used to give financial advice, avoid debts, prevent fraud by 

detecting irregular financial transactions.While robotics technology 

promises to transform the financial services industry, the paper also looks 

into the challenges it presents. This paper pays a special reference in 

examining the role of robots as consultants in banks and identifying the 

impact of automated lockers using robotic arms such as the one used by 

ICICI Smart Vault in India. Study aims to clarify some of the aspects related 

to the usage of Robotic arm technology as deployed by ICICI Bank in their 

Smart Vault service recently. 

I. INTRODUCTION: THE JOURNEY OF BANKING 

Steve Jobs once said that, “You can’t connect the dots looking forward; you can only 

connect them looking backwards.” So by observing the history of banking we will be able to 

connect the dots better. It all began with the first prototype banks of merchants of the 

. 



6297

ISSN: 2347-1697 




ancient world, which sanctioned grain loans to farmers and traders. This system emerged 

around 2000 BC in Assyria and Babylonia and later it was spread all across ancient Greece 

and Roman Empire. This includes lender, based in temples, providing loans and accepting 

deposits. According to the studies conducted by the archaeologists, from this period 

onwards evidence of money lending activity was also observed in the ancient China and 

India. As time progressed, banks evolved tremendously. During the 20th century, major 

changes were observed in banks’ operations due to developments in telecommunications 

and computing technology. This led to a dramatic increase in the size of banks and also was 

soon geographically spread across the globe. 

1.1 Drastic Developments 

In the year 1944, post Second World War, two organizations were created - The 

International Monetary Fund (IMF) and the World Bank (Raymond F. Mikesell, The 

Bretton Woods Debates: A Memoir, Essays in International Finance 192 (Princeton: 

International Finance Section, Department of Economics, Princeton University, 1994). With 

the help and support of these institutions, commercial banks started to lend money to the 

sovereign in the third world. An increase in the use of technology in the retail banking was 

seen during this period. In 1959, upon agreement from the banks, a standard for machine 

readable characters (MICR), which was patented in the United States for the use with 

cheques, led to the invention of the first automated reader-sorter machines. In the 1960s, the 

first Automated Teller Machines (ATM) or Cash machines were developed and launched 

into the markets towards the end of the decade ("How the ATM Revolutionized the Banking 

Business". Bloomberg News. 27 March 2013). Around 1970s, heavy investments were 

made by the Banks in computer technology to automate much of the manual processing, 

which led to the shift in paradigm of banks from large clerical staff to new automated 

systems. 

Meanwhile in India, banking originated in the last decades of the 18th century with Bank of 

Hindustan being one the first banks which was established in India, in the year 1770 Radhe 

Shyam Rungta (1970). 

The Rise of Business Corporations in India, 1851-1900. CUP Archive. p. 221. Retrieved 12 

January 2015; "The Advent of Modern Banking in India: 1720 to 1850s". Reserve Bank of 

India. Retrieved 12 January 2015.) The largest and the oldest bank still in existence, is the 

State Bank of India. It originated as a combination of the three banks which were funded by 

a presidency government - i.e. the Bank of Bengal, the Bank of Bombay and the Bank of 

Madras. The three banks were merged together to form the Imperial Bank of India, in the 

year 1921, which upon India’s independence became the State Bank of India in 1955 

("Evolution of SBI". State Bank of India. Retrieved 12 January 2015). The revolution in the 

IT sector has had a great impact on the Indian banking system. The use of technology and 

computers has led to the introduction of online banking in India. After the economic 

liberalization of 1991, the use of computers has increased drastically. Without the use of 

information technology, the Indian Banks were finding it very difficult to compete with 

International Banks in terms of customer service. In order to survive the growing 

Dr. Anuja Agarwal, Rohan Arora, Kriti Dua, Meryl Cherian :: 


6298

ISSN: 2347-1697 




competition, RBI took necessary steps such as setting up number of committees to define 

and coordinate banking technology. 

In 2008 the Reserve Bank of India introduced a system which allowed cheque truncation in 

India. This cheque truncation system was first launched in the National Capital Region and 

then it was rolled out nationally. 

1.1.1 Use of Technology in Expansion of banking infrastructure 

Since the last few decades, physical as well as virtual expansion of banking through mobile 

banking, internet banking, tele banking, biometric and mobile ATMs has been taking place 

and has gained momentum in the recent years. 

By the end of June 2012, the total number of Automated Teller Machines (ATMs) installed 

in India by various banks was 99,218. Most of the ATMs are owned by the new private 

sector banks, followed by the offsite ATMs belonging to SBI and its subsidiaries. 

1.2 Robotics in Banking 

Instant banking has carved a comfortable space for the urban user. The fact that you can 

access your account through your smartphone and make difficult transactions in split 

seconds has generated new opportunities in banking technology. The next game changer to 

make a mark on the global banking platform is advanced robotic technology. Robots are all 

set enter into the foray of conventional banking. High on speed, they can not only increase 

productivity but also provide services 24/7. Agreed that till some time ago, robots as entities 

seemed perfectly existential in a movie like 'Transformers'. Today, however, robotic 

technology has arrived on the world scene, having been designed to perform innumerable 

tasks with effectiveness and near precision. In a layman’s language, ‘They are stepping right 

out of science fiction into our everyday world’. Although globally robots have yet to pave 

their way into futuristically planned banks, the vision is beginning to gain momentum. But 

keeping the convenience factor aside, use of robotic technology also offers a competitive 

working environment. Cognizant, an IT and consulting firm conducted a study about the 

impact digital technology has made in the work environment of human workers. 

Interestingly, 26 percent of the banking respondents said front office and customerinteracting 

automation contributed to a good 15 percent cost savings annually. Also, the 

process flow has become standardised, error rates have reduced and there is a decreased 

dependency on multiple processes to execute a task. For users, assurance of safety and 

security is of prime importance. 

1.3 Recent Developments in the use of Robotics in banks 

Tokyo-Mitsubishi UFJ Bank has employed a robot called Nao manufactured by Alderban 

electronics. This two feet tall robot can answer to inquiries about steps one should take 

upon losing their credit card or helping someone open bank account in various languages. 

Nao is being used to meet and greet customers through inbuilt facial recognition 

software, respond to simple questions hence releasing a bit of the branch staffs’ time to 

work on more value added services. 

Barclays plans on using robots to help make money transfers and perform primary tasks. 

The bank plans on realising an artificial intelligence system on the lines of Apple’s 



6299

ISSN: 2347-1697 




iPhone assistant Siri, enabling customers to talk to the device and receive the information 

they ask for. 

Singapore DBS has created a wealth management application that is centred on Watson, a 

cloud-based technology developed by IBM. Watson can process massive volumes of 

information and learns from each interaction, helping banks to quickly analyse, 

understand and respond to enormous sums of Big Data. 

ICICI Bank in India has launched Smart Vault, a fully automated locker. Customers can 

access their lockers at any time and minimizes human interaction while operating a 

locker. The advanced Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) mechanism scans the 

customer's request and retrieves their locker using a robotic arm from a robust and secure 

vault. 

1.4 Future of Robotics in Banking 

The future seems to be highly promising. Few years down the lane, banks will be serving 

fewer clients physically while having a deeper relationship with them. Robots will serve 

as a means to store data and could work alongside humans which will help them to work 

more efficiently (Jeet, 2015). There will be robot advisors in the future banks which will 

help people to make correct financial decisions and prevent them from making unsound 

decisions. The future banking may be completely replaced by platforms run by robots. As 

mentioned in the article “Robotics in Banking, 2015”, the Robotic Process Automation or 

what Andrew Burgess, an outsourcing advisor, calls “robotic software agents”, does not 

depend on arms and legs but has a powerful impact when it comes to repetitive processes 

that are rules-based and frequent. Banks can entertain queries all through the day and 

night using this Robotic Process Automation, which will in effect prove to be 

considerably economic than remunerating an employee. 

Banks are under a constant pressure to innovate due to rising competition from 

alternative payment providers and payment sources. Industry observers have also said 

that robotics is shaping the future of banking. Now a days, use of robotics is done to 

collect data, to provide customer recommendations and to answer customers in bank 

branches. Banks are using social robots for enhancing customer experience by combining 

web, touch speech, Artificial intelligence etc. (Light, 2016). 

Most banks have used humans as robots in branches for years, (disempowering tellers 

and purely asking them to process transactions accurately first time, every time). These 

are the functions we’ve been replacing for years. After all, an ATM is an ‘Automated 

Teller Machine’ a robot teller. Robots in banking have the potential to reduce costs, 

expand skills and improve the customer experience. According to Brown, Roehrig, & 

Malhotra (2015), the top drivers for automation beyond cost savings include: Reduced 

error rates (21%) Better management of repeatable tasks (21%) Improved 

standardization of process workflow (19%) Reduce reliance on multiple systems/screens 

to complete a process (14%) reducing friction (11%). According to Brown et al., (2015), 

there will be substantial cost savings reaching up to 55% by implementing robotics in 

banking 



6300

ISSN: 2347-1697 




According to Divekar (2015), the ongoing industrial revolution will give rise to smart 

banks which will effectively serve our new generations raised on smart phones and 

technology. Robots will also be used in back office operation for automating manual 

process through rules based processing and decision making. This will eliminate error 

and enable smart and intelligent operation in back office operation. Automation, 

virtualization and cloud computing will be key themes for banking. 

In the coming years, Cloud computing will also utilized by the banks in form of cloud 

robotics. According to Dasgupta (2014), cloud robotics is defined as the application of 

cloud computing technology to robots. In cloud robotics technology the autonomous 

behaviour of the robot is shifted to cloud and the remote computer can communicate to 

robots using internet. This literature indicates that bank will be able to use the technology 

of cloud robotics by leveraging cloud computing technology which will help banks to 

automate their back office operations. Cloud Roboting, along the lines of cloud 

computing, can make high-speed operations as it will give the robot access to vast 

amount of virtual data storage. They are not subject to the restrictions that inbuilt storage 

brings thus making performances faster. With the rapid surge in application-related data 

acquisition, every customer’s experience can be more than personalised. Like your 

smartphone sends you reminders, the next time you walk into a bank, you might be 

greeted with a mechanised tone, “Sir, is it not your birthday today? Happy Birthday! How 

may I assist you?" 

1.5 Robots - A threat to Employment? 

According to Kehoe (2015), robots will be performing almost half of manufacturing tasks in 

a decade and doing everything from driving cars, to providing investment advice and 

performing medical surgery, according to a landmark technology disruption report. Robots 

and machines that think like humans via artificial intelligence (AI) are set to make many 

people's lives more convenient and slash business costs in the years to come. 

With the rise of intelligent machines we are facing a paradigm shift which will change the 

way we live and work. Although the robotics industry is creating millions of new jobs, the 

bank's researches warn the replacement of workers with machines could exacerbate 

inequality between skilled and non-skilled workers. And with 50 billion devices connected 

to the internet by 2020, cybersecurity and privacy will become major challenges for firms 

and people. The impact on employment is no longer confined to the blue collar sector. 

Robots and AI are already playing a major role in our daily lives as providers of labour, 

mobility, safety, convenience, and entertainment. AI, which is in its infancy, is where 

machines or software are created to have human-like intelligence, potentially rendering 

workers redundant. On the other hand, the macroeconomic factors such as the ageing of the 

population, the push for energy efficiency and wage inflation will also increase business 

demand for robots. 

This Research study aims to clarify some of the aspects related to the usage of Robotic arm 

technology as deployed by ICICI Bank in their Smart Vault service recently. 



6301

ISSN: 2347-1697 




II. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 

2.1 Objective of the study: The purpose of this study is to understand the future of 

Robotics in banking in two critical aspects: 

● To identify the impact of ICICI bank Smart Vault robotic technology in future banking of 

India. 

● To investigate whether robots can be used effectively as consultants in future banking. 

The research undertaken was qualitative and quantitative in nature, designed in a manner to 

understand the future of robotics with respect to Automated lockers as used by ICICI Smart 

Vault, and the potential to use robots as financial consultants in the near future of the 

banking sector. 

2.2 Data collection instruments & sample size 

The data for the study was collected using the following instruments: 

A. Survey Questionnaires 

A structured questionnaire consisting of 3 sub-parts and 26 questions was developed. The 

first sub-part consisting of 4 questions focused on the demographic details of the individuals 

being surveyed. The second sub-part comprising of 13 questions highlighted the consumer’s 

feedback on the implementation of automated lockers such as ICICI Smart Vault and their 

response towards the paradigm shift from the conventional manual lockers to the advanced 

automated lockers. The third sub-par consisting of 9 questions majorly concentrated on 

acquiring the level of acceptance amongst individuals for the robotic technology being 

utilized in banks as consultants in the following decades to come. It also emphasized on the 

security concerns which might erupt in future due to induction of advanced and 

sophisticated technology. 

The data for our questionnaire was collected through a survey of 59 individuals between the 

age group of 35-55 years. These individuals were the earning members of their family, 

would avail locker facilities and would also require professional assistance on financial 

matters. The collected data was selected by convenience sampling and cluster sampling 

method so that there is an equal probability of every element being selected from the 

targeted audience. 

The reliability of data was established using Cronbach’s Alpha, the data itself was analysed 

through Factor Analysis and Correlation. 

B. Qualitative Tool: Interviews 

10 questions were developed in all for the interviews consisting of demographic details of 

the individuals, their views on implementation of automated lockers such as ICICI Smart 

Vault and their response towards the paradigm shift from the conventional manual lockers 

to the advanced automated lockers & level of acceptance towards robotic technology being 

utilized in banks as consultants in the following decades to come.Interviews were 

undertaken for 30 individuals between the age group of 35-55 years. These individuals were 

the earning members of their family, would avail locker facilities and would also require 

professional assistance on financial matters. The data was analysed by using Word Cloud 

software. 



6302

ISSN: 2347-1697 




III. RESULTS & DISCUSSION 

3.1 Quantitative Analysis 

Communalities 

3.1.1 Reliability Test : The reliability of data was established using Cronbach’s Alpha tool 

in SPSS and the value of Cronbach’s alpha for the questionnaire responded to by 59 

persons, was calculated as 0.838, which lies in the acceptable limits of Reliability of the 

questionnaire and the data collected through it. 

Table-1: Case Processing Summary 

N % 

Cases Valid 59 100.0 

Excluded a 0 .0 

Total 59 100.0 

Table 2: Reliability Statistics 

Cronbach's 

Alpha 

N of Items 

.838 22 

3.1.2 Interpretation: 

From the reliability analysis of twenty two items it can be concluded that all the items are 

valid and have acceptable reliability co-efficient of greater than 0.7 as shown in table 

Reliability Statistics. 

3.2 Factor Analysis 

A factor analysis was conducted to find out what different factors contribute towards a bank 

customer’s idea of ‘convenience of using a locker’. 

Table – 3: KMO and Bartlett’s Test 

Correlation Matrix 

Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling Adequacy. .715 

Bartlett’s Test of Sphericity Approx. Chi-Square 734.791 

Df 231 

Sig. 

.000 

From table-3,we found that the value for Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling 

Adequacy was more than 0.6, and it is 0.715 also Bartlett's Test of Sphericity has sig value 

less than 0.05 at 5 % level of significance. So factor analysis could be conducted 

successfully for data reduction. Following is the table-2 showing Labels for the 

corresponding variables. 



6303

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Table 4: Labels for the corresponding variables 

Components 

Labels 

My bank locker should be …. [Close to my home ] 

V1 

My bank locker should be …. [Very strong (no one should be able to break it ) ] V2 

My bank locker should be …. [Protected by the banks host security system ] V3 

My bank locker should Extraction be …. Sums [Accessible to me anytime whenever I want to 

of Squared 

V4 

operate it (anytime of day or night) ] 

My bank locker should Loadings be …. [Convenient for Rotation me to reach Sums physically of Squared and Loadings operate , 

Component Cumulative % Total % of Variance Cumulative 

V5 

never mind my age or physical ability ] 

% 

My 1 bank locker should be …. 26.134 [In a bank that 3.741 has a good reputation 17.006 ] 

17.006 V6 

My 2 bank locker should be 46.544 …. [Using latest 3.267 technology available 14.849 to provide me 31.855 

3 54.060 2.790 12.682 44.537 

V7 

better service] 

My 4 bank locker should be …. 60.508 [Very Easy to operate 2.218 ] 10.083 54.620 V8 

My 5 bank locker should be …. 66.142 [In a room which 2.105 ensures my privacy 9.567 while viewing 64.187 

my 6 locker contents] 71.610 1.633 7.423 71.610 

V9 

My bank locker should be …. [In a room with pleasing ambience] 

V10 

My bank locker should be …. [In a room which has a place for me to sit and place 

my locker contents] 

V11 

How many times do you operate the locker facility ? 

V12 

If given an opportunity to opt for an automated locker over manual locker, then 

would that be a solution to all the problem faced while operating an manual locker 

V13 

A robot can serve people better in banks compared to humans 

V14 

Robots can be trusted with all the confidential data and necessary personal details 

pertaining to bank accounts. 

V15 

Robots can anticipate my banking related outcomes and resolve them efficiently. V16 

Robotic consultants will analyse my current financial status and patterns hence 

helping me avoid future financial deficits. 

V17 

A robot will understand my financial queries and assist me better than a human. V18 

After being guided by a robotic consultant, there will still be a need for human 

consultants to be more certain with decisions on important matters . 

V19 

Due to 24*7 functioning facility provided by a robot banking services can be 

availed at any time during the day as per my convenience. 

V20 

A robot can process loans in a much faster manner thereby helping the loan 

application procedure become less cumbersome and time saving. 

V21 

A robot consultant with a human like interface and sensing abilities can be a better 

judge of problems than their human counterparts. 

V22 

Table – 5: Extraction Method: Principal Component Analysis. 

Labels Initial Extraction 

V1 1 0.786 

V2 1 0.582 

V3 1 0.792 

V4 1 0.76 

V5 1 0.675 



6304

ISSN: 2347-1697 




V6 1 0.74 

V7 1 0.745 

V8 1 0.507 

V9 1 0.686 

V10 1 0.722 

V11 1 0.697 

V12 1 0.599 

V13 1 0.536 

V14 1 0.718 

V15 1 0.784 

V16 1 0.77 

V17 1 0.762 

V18 1 0.837 

V19 1 0.657 

V20 1 0.847 

V21 1 0.802 

V22 1 0.749 

From the above table-5 we can observe that the factors which have values greater than 0.5 

can be taken into consideration for further analysis. 

Table 6: Total Variance Explained 

Extraction Sums 

of Squared 

Loadings 

Rotation Sums of Squared Loadings 

Component Cumulative % Total % of Variance Cumulative % 

1 26.134 3.741 17.006 17.006 

2 46.544 3.267 14.849 31.855 

3 54.060 2.790 12.682 44.537 

4 60.508 2.218 10.083 54.620 

5 66.142 2.105 9.567 64.187 

6 71.610 1.633 7.423 71.610 

From the above table-6 we can see that six factors can be identified from all the variables 

with Eigen values greater than 1. All the above factors were capable of explaining 71.610% 

of variance. 

Figure -6: Screen Plot 



6305

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Table 6: Rotated Component Matrix 

Labels 

Component 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

V1 0.069 0.114 0.096 0.105 0.865 -0.017 

V2 0.341 -0.13 -0.38 0.05 0.545 0.066 

V3 0.382 -0.014 0.051 0.008 0.784 0.171 

V4 0.17 -0.071 -0.073 0.04 0.127 0.839 

V5 0.658 0.171 0.088 -0.27 0.341 0.123 

V6 0.806 0.079 0.169 -0.172 0.157 -0.041 

V7 0.765 -0.206 0.196 0.159 -0.048 0.225 

V8 0.59 0.222 -0.159 -0.217 0.187 0.048 

V9 0.544 -0.038 -0.205 0.002 0.357 0.468 

V10 0.749 0.164 0.045 0.327 0.154 -0.019 

V11 0.511 -0.334 -0.22 0.154 0.075 -0.496 

V12 0.113 -0.015 0.757 0.024 0 -0.114 

V13 0.438 0.326 -0.108 0.449 0.115 -0.11 

V14 0.069 0.454 0.643 0.274 -0.034 0.134 

V15 0.032 0.139 0.655 0.433 -0.06 0.379 

V16 -0.121 0.506 0.534 0.451 0.074 -0.071 

V17 -0.07 0.601 0.547 0.214 0.113 -0.195 

V18 0.161 0.686 0.528 0.078 0.114 -0.206 

V19 0.029 0.337 0.192 0.695 0.065 -0.136 

V20 -0.172 0.205 0.319 0.783 0.06 0.239 

V21 0.13 0.83 0.006 0.239 -0.162 0.109 

V22 0.08 0.836 0.088 0.157 0.102 0.039 

Table 7: Rotated Component Matrix 

Labels 

Component 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

V1 0.069 0.114 0.096 0.105 0.865 -0.017 

V2 0.341 -0.13 -0.38 0.05 0.545 0.066 

V3 0.382 -0.014 0.051 0.008 0.784 0.171 

V4 0.17 -0.071 -0.073 0.04 0.127 0.839 

V5 0.658 0.171 0.088 -0.27 0.341 0.123 

V6 0.806 0.079 0.169 -0.172 0.157 -0.041 

V7 0.765 -0.206 0.196 0.159 -0.048 0.225 

V8 0.59 0.222 -0.159 -0.217 0.187 0.048 

V9 0.544 -0.038 -0.205 0.002 0.357 0.468 

V10 0.749 0.164 0.045 0.327 0.154 -0.019 

V11 0.511 -0.334 -0.22 0.154 0.075 -0.496 

V12 0.113 -0.015 0.757 0.024 0 -0.114 

V13 0.438 0.326 -0.108 0.449 0.115 -0.11 

V14 0.069 0.454 0.643 0.274 -0.034 0.134 

V15 0.032 0.139 0.655 0.433 -0.06 0.379 

V16 -0.121 0.506 0.534 0.451 0.074 -0.071 



6306

ISSN: 2347-1697 




V17 -0.07 0.601 0.547 0.214 0.113 -0.195 

V18 0.161 0.686 0.528 0.078 0.114 -0.206 

V19 0.029 0.337 0.192 0.695 0.065 -0.136 

V20 -0.172 0.205 0.319 0.783 0.06 0.239 

V21 0.13 0.83 0.006 0.239 -0.162 0.109 

V22 0.08 0.836 0.088 0.157 0.102 0.039 

Extraction Method: Principal Component Analysis. 

Rotation Method: Varimax with Kaiser Normalization. a 

a. Rotation converged in 14 iterations. 

On the basis of the above table-7, we found 6 components for our 22 variables. Based on the 

item loadings these factors were respectively labelled as; 

1. The Factor “Reputed bank with latest technology for customer’s convenience” – 

explains the 1 st component. 

Following are the components which represent the attributes the interviewees prefer 

to have in their locker. 

Convenient for me to reach physically and operate , never mind my age or physical 

ability 

A bank that has a good reputation 

Uses latest technology available to provide me better service 

A room with pleasing ambience 

2. The Factor “A Robotic consultant solving financial queries” – explains the 2 nd 

component. Following table shows the components: 

Robotic consultants will analyse my current financial status and patterns hence 

helping me avoid future financial deficits. 

A robot will understand my financial queries and assist me better than a human. 

A robot consultant with a human like interface and sensing abilities can be a better 


3. The Factor “Trust in Robotic capabilities to serve better” – explains the 3 rd 

component. Following table shows the components: 

A robot can serve people better in banks compared to humans 

Robots can be trusted with all the confidential data and necessary personal details 

pertaining to bank accounts. 

4. The Factor “A Robotic consultant with 24*7 functionality” – explains the 4 th 

component. 

After being guided by a robotic consultant, there will still be a need for human 

consultants to be more certain with decisions on important matters. 

Due to 24*7 functioning facility provided by a robot banking services can be availed 

at any time during the day as per my convenience. 

V5 

V6 

V7 

V10 

V17 

V18 

V22 

V14 

V15 

V19 

V20 



6307

ISSN: 2347-1697 




5. The Factor “A secure locker in the vicinity” – explains the 5 th component. Following 

table shows the components; 

Bank locker should be close to my home 

Bank locker should be protected by the banks host security system 

6. The Factor “24*7 accessibility of locker” – explains the 6 th component. 

Bank locker should be accessible any time of day 

V1 

V3 

V4 

Table – 8: Component Transformation Matrix 

Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 .275 .642 .529 .445 .177 .054 

2 .807 -.163 -.268 -.144 .455 .152 

3 -.215 -.317 .121 .286 .142 .858 

4 .401 -.463 .577 -.046 -.537 -.048 

5 -.122 -.493 .098 .556 .434 -.484 

6 .227 .056 -.540 .623 -.514 .031 

From the above table-8, we can infer that all the factors are related and dependent on each 

other. The matrix displays the correlation among the components prior to and after rotation. 

3.3.1 HYPOTHESIS – I 

H0: An automated locker wouldn’t be able to overcome the problems faced while operating 

a manual locker 

H1: An automated locker would be able to overcome the problems faced while operating a 

manual locker 

Table – 9: T-Test 

One-Sample Statistics 

N 

Mean 

Std. 

Deviation 

Std. 

Error 

Mean 

If given an opportunity to opt for an automated 

locker over manual locker, then would that be a 

solution to all the problem faced while operating 

an manual locker 

59 3.93 1.230 .160 

Table 9(a): 

One-Sample Test 

Test Value = 2 

T 

df 

Sig. (2- 

tailed) 

Mean 

Difference 



6308

ISSN: 2347-1697 






solution to all the problem faced while 

operating an manual locker 

12.068 58 .000 1.932 

Table – 9(b) 



95% Confidence 

Interval of the 

Difference 

Lower 

Upper 



solution to all the problem faced while operating an 

manual locker 

1.61 2.25 


From the above t-test conducted on the quantitative data for hypothesis testing, we observed 

that for t(58)=12.068, p-value is less than 0.05 (i.e. 0.000) as shown in the table-10(a). 

Hence we can safely say that the Null hypothesis can be rejected and the alternate one holds 

true. 

Thus, an automated locker will be able to overcome the problems faced while operating a 

manual locker. 

3.3.3 HYPOTHESIS – II 

H0: A robotic consultant with a human like interface and sensing abilities will not be a 

better judge of financial circumstances than their human counterparts. 

H1: A robotic consultant with a human like interface and sensing abilities will be a better 

judge of financial circumstances than their human counterparts. 

Table – 10: T-Test 

One-Sample Statistics 

N 

Mean 

Std. 

Deviation 

Std. 

Error 

Mean 

A robot consultant with a human like interface 59 3.61 1.451 .189 



6309

ISSN: 2347-1697 




and sensing abilities can be a better judge of 

problems than their human counterparts. 

Table – 10 (a) 



t 

df 

Sig. (2- 

tailed) 

Mean 

Difference 

A robot consultant with a human like interface 

and sensing abilities can be a better judge of 

problems than their human counterparts. 

8.527 58 .000 1.610 

Table – 10 (b) 



95% Confidence Interval of the 

Difference 

Lower 

Upper 

A robot consultant with a human like interface and 

sensing abilities can be a better judge of problems than 

their human counterparts. 

1.23 1.99 


From the above t-test conducted on the quantitative data for hypothesis testing, we observed 

that for t(58)=8.527, p-value is less than 0.05 (i.e. 0.000) as shown in the table-12(a). Hence 

we can safely say that the Null hypothesis can be rejected and the alternate one holds true. 

Thus, a robotic consultant with a human like interface and sensing abilities will be a better 


3.4 QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS 

3.4.1 PART A 

The qualitative analysis was done on the data generated from the interviews of 10 persons. 

All the respondents between the age group of 30 to 55 owned a locker. Their impressions as 

collected by the interviewer and converted into a word cloud are presented as follows: 



6310

ISSN: 2347-1697 




What do you need a Locker/ Vault for ? 

Figure 1 

The above word cloud highlights the various needs to possess a locker. The varied needs of 

the individuals encompass keeping of valuables such as jewellery, gold, important 

documents and cash. 

What are your Reasons and the frequency of operating a locker? 

Figure 2 

The reasons to operate a locker can be many. The majority of the reasons stated are shown 

in the word cloud above, which could be flaunting your jewellery on special occasions, 

weddings, and festive occasion’s etcetera. The reasons involved in accessing a locker will 



6311

ISSN: 2347-1697 




directly influence the frequency at which individuals will feel the need to operate the locker, 

which could be 4-5 times a year or once every two months. 

What Attributes do you look for in a locker? 

Figure 3 

Some of the basic attributes which an individual looks for in a locker are safety, robust 

security, privacy, ease to access the locker, spaciousness, convenient height, and nearness to 

home. Also some of the individuals required a table to keep their contents while viewing 

them. Whereas some also wanted the locker to be reasonably priced. 

What is your Level of Satisfaction with the current locker? 

Figure 4 

The overall level of satisfaction of the individual with respect to their locker facility is 

between moderate to high. Though some of the individuals were dissatisfied with the current 

facility for reasons such as long waiting queues, difficulty faced due to height, insufficient 



6312

ISSN: 2347-1697 




space, privacy and many more. But they are continuing with the same locker facility since 

they don’t have much of a choice. 

Are you aware about the ICICI Smart Vault locker? 

Figure 5 

There are low levels of awareness of the ICICI smart vault. Not many individuals were 

aware about this facility until the video was shown to them. Most of the interviewees who 

knew about this were either from Delhi or worked in banks. 

Are you willing to opt for the automated locker over manual locker? 

Figure 7 



6313

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Majority of the interviewees showed a positive response towards the willingness to opt for 

the automated locker over the manual locker which is clearly visible from the above word 

cloud provided they get better facilities and added benefits as compared to the current 

facility. 

How much is your Willingness to spend 10,000 to acquire an automated locker? 

Figure 8 

Willingness to shell out 10 thousand for an automated locker was not much of a big deal for 

the individuals under survey. They agreed to opt for a facility such as this with a price of 10 

thousand provided that they get better facilities and it is worth every penny being invested 

for acquiring one. 

3.4.2 PART B 

Interviewees were asked to imagine a hypothetical scenario, wherein they enter a bank and 

get a warm welcome by a Robot, who would be responsible to assist them with all their 

inquiries and make their experience at the bank worthwhile before the following questions. 

Factors affecting willingness to let Robots handle financial details 

Figure 9 



6314

ISSN: 2347-1697 




The above word cloud indicates that a majority of the interviewees stated trust as their 

biggest factor affecting their willingness to reveal their financial and confidential data to 

robots. An increase in the number of cybercrimes and security breaches could be one of the 

possible reasons affecting their willingness. 

Accuracy of Robots in relation to human counterparts 

Figure 10 

A majority of the interviewees agreed to robots producing and predicting facts and figures 

with greater accuracy. The cloud indicates a majority of them would definitely provide 

much better advice if the Robots were given an access to their financial details. 

Need for a human consultant even after being consulted by a robot 

Figure 11 



6315

ISSN: 2347-1697 




The cloud indicates that a majority of the interviewees agreed to the fact that there will 

always be a need to be consulted by a human consultant even after their queries have being 

dealt by a robot. This need to double check is mostly factored from the necessity for a 

personalized touch and comfort levels felt while interacting human consultants. 

Presence of robots in future of banking 

Figure 12 

The cloud signifies that a bulk of the respondents agreed to robots occupying a large 

presence in the future of banking. The cloud also points to the fact that this era to come into 

existence will take decades and is a gradual process which needs societal acceptance. 

IV. CONCLUSION 

The study titled “Future of robotics in banking” was conducted for the purpose of 

understanding the influence of robotics in banking in form of automated lockers and if 

robotics consultants with human like interface can be efficient than humans in solving 

customer’s problems. 

As the years roll by, there will be huge developments in the field of technology in every 

sector from every industry and banking will be one of them. Because of the significant 

potential benefits there is probably no turning back, there will be increasing use of robots in 

the future of banking. However, these robots will introduce a number of business, security 

and privacy issues which will have to be addressed if they are to succeed in the marketplace. 

With increasing cybercrimes, data loss due to hacking, customers feel uncomfortable to 

provide their financial details. Hence it is important to build trust early amongst these 

customers to survive the dynamic changes in the market. Although robots would reduce the 

day to day workload in banks and make the processes more convenient, but there will 

always be a need to have a human touch. The reliance on robotic technology will not 

decrease the need to have a human figure around us for help. 



6316

ISSN: 2347-1697 




From the Quantitative data collected over 59 samples we found that an automated locker 

will overcome problems faced while operating the manual locker as it will be convenient to 

reach and would be available anytime during the day. Also a robotic consultant with a 

human like interface will be a better judge of problems than human counter parts in future. 

With the introduction of SmartVault locker by ICICI bank in the Delhi branch, India has 

also entered the race of never-ending competition in the field of technology. After having 

conducted interviews of 30 individuals (qualitative analysis) we were able to observe their 

response towards the SmartVault locker and in if they are willing to be served by a robotic 

consultant in the future. 

According to our research it can be concluded that people will opt for automated lockers 

over manual lockers (if available at an affordable price or at same price as that of a manual 

locker. Also, people believe that there will be a presence of robotics in future and robots will 

predict facts and figures more accurately but there will be a need of human consultant even 

after being consulted by a robot. Last but not the least, the future of robotics in banking 

seems to be highly promising. Few years down the lane, banks will be serving fewer clients 

physically while having a deeper relationship with them. Robots will serve as a means to 

store data and could work alongside humans which will help them to work more efficiently. 

There will be Robot advisors in the future banks which will help people to make correct 

financial decisions and prevent them from making unsound decisions. The future of banking 

may be completely replaced by platforms run by robots. Banks can entertain queries all 

through the day and night using this Robotic Process Automation, which will in effect prove 

to be considerably economic than remunerating an employee. But for such an revolutionary 

era to come into existence, it might take decades. There will always be resistance to change 

which is a natural human tendency which in combination with the conservative Indian 

society can further cause a delay in the advancement of technological infrastructure in the 

banking sector. 

V. FUTURE SCOPE 

This research can be further enhanced by considering the viewpoints of bank employees, on 

how they perceive the role of robotics in the future of banking. Also, research can be carried 

out for a larger sample size for quantitative and qualitative data. Apart from using 

interviews as a tool for qualitative data collection, the report can be further developed by 

using focused group discussions (FGD).The goal of technology is mostly to minimize the 

need for human brains, and remove the requirement for human strength. Complete digital 

automation denotes no thought, no human activity or association whatsoever. Since 

maximum financial services are merely concerned with lending or borrowing bits (financial 

data), they are heading in the direction of digital automation on a large scale. Each stage in 

this course results in replacement of jobs by their robot counterparts. There are many who 

think that automation and robotics are going to lead to massive unemployment and others 

who think that in general humans respond to shifts in employment opportunities by creating 

new opportunities. These two groups also share certain hopes and concerns about the impact 



6317

ISSN: 2347-1697 




of technology on employment. For instance, many are concerned that our existing social 

structures are not adequately preparing people for the skills that will be required to sustain 

in the ever-changing market conditions. On the contrary, the others have hope that the 

coming changes will be an opportunity to re-examine our society’s relationship to 

employment itself by creating new avenues for work. Further research can be developed 

upon the shift in employment trends, caused by implementation of robotic technologies on a 

large scale in banks. 


[1] Bankunda, H.M.(2015).The World of Robots Tomorrow. Bloomington, IN: Booktando 

[2] Skinner, C. (2007).The Future of Banking in a Globalized World. West Sussex, England: 

John Wiley & sons. 

[3] Groover,M.P., Weiss, M., Nagel ,R.N., Odrey, N.G.,& Dutta,A.(2012).Industrial Robotics: 

Technology, Programming, and Applications (2nd Ed).New Delhi: McGraw Hill 

Education. 

[4] EMIS. (2015, December 30). Banking 2020: Technology disruption in banking. Data Quest. 

Retrieved from EMIS Professional database. 

[5] Light, J. (2016, January 8). Future of banking blog [Web log post]. Retrieved from 

[6] http://fsblog.accenture.com/banking/category/future-of-banking/ 

[7] Osborne, M.,& Frey, C.B. (2013,September 17).Retrieved from: 

http://www.oxfordmartin.ox.ac.uk/downloads/academic/The_Future_of_Employment.pdf 

[8] Marous J. (2015, July 7). Retrieved from http://thefinancialbrand.com/52735/robotsartificial-intelligence-ai-banking/. 

[9] Divekar, S. (2015).Banking, as we don’t know it, yet! [White Paper].Retrieved from Tata 

Consultancy Services website: http://www.tcs.com/SiteCollectionDocuments/White- 

Papers/BPS-Banking-As-We-Dont-Know-It-Yet-0715-1.pdf 

[10] Dasgupta, M. (2014). Innovations In Cloud Robotics (Technical Insight). Technical Insights 

Reports. Retrieved from Frost & Sullivan database. 

[11] Robotics in banking. (2015,October 23).Retrieved from 

http://perspectives.icicibank.com/robotics-in-banking 

[12] Samuelson, R.J. (2015, March 17).Who’s afraid of robots?.The Hindu. Retrieved from: 

http://www.thehindu.com/todays-paper/tp-opinion/whos-afraid-of-robots/article7000963.ece 

[13] Kehoe, J. (2015, November 11). Robots threaten jobs of bankers, lawyers: Bank of America 

says.Financial Review. Retrieved from http://www.afr.com/leadership/robots-threaten-jobsof-bankers-lawyers-bank-of-america-says-20151110-gkvtsk 

[14] Natrajan, V.N. (2014).26 million mobile robots globally by 2020 to create an autonomous 

world!.Marketing Insights Reports. Retrieved from Frost & Sullivan database. 

[15] Bernardo Batiz-Lazo (2013, 27 March) How the ATM Revolutionized the Banking Business. 

Bloomberg News. Retrieved from: http://www.bloombergview.com/articles/2013-03- 

27/how-the-atm-revolutionized-the-banking-business 

[16] Raymond F. Mikesell, The Bretton Woods Debates: A Memoir, Essays in International 

Finance 192 (Princeton: International Finance Section, Department of Economics, Princeton 

University, 1994) 

[17] Nocks, L. (2007). The robot: the life story of a technology. Westport, CT: Greenwood 

Publishing Group. 

[18] Robotics.(n.d.).Retrieved from: https://www.pc-control.co.uk/robotics.htm 

[19] Brown, R.H.,Roehrig,P.,Malhotra,V.(2015).The robot and I:How New Digital Technologies 

Are Making Smart People and Businesses Smarter [White Paper]. Retrieved from Cognizant 



6318

ISSN: 2347-1697 




website:http://www.cognizant.com/InsightsWhitepapers/the-robot-and-I-how-new-digitaltechnologies-are-making-smart-people-and-businesses-smarter-codex1193.pdf 

[20] "20 years on: How will we be living with our robots?". Tea after Twelve. Retrieved March 

2015. 

[21] Patrick Dixon (2015, November 28), Future of Banking: New Technology Impact on 

Corporate Banking, Retrieved from http://www.globalchange.com/technobank.htm 

[22] John Mauldin (2014, Aug 20), Here’s How Robots Could Change The World By 2025, 

Retrieved from http://www.businessinsider.com/heres-how-robots-could-change-the-worldby-2025-2014-8?IR=T 

AUTHOR’S BIOGRAPHIES 

Dr. Anuja Agarwal is Associate Dean-Technology management 

MPSTME,NMIMS Mumbai. She has a Ph.D in Management Studies 

(Ph.D Topic: Study of Applying Creativity, Design thinking and 

Innovation in Management education) - Mumbai University and MCA, 

B.Sc. (Computer Science). Her areas of specialization are Design 

Thinking and Innovation in Management and Human Computer 

Interaction .She has contributed in over 10 research papers which consists 

of 6 International and 4 national papers. She has also authored 2 case 

studies and is a keen speaker in various seminars and conferences. Apart 

from that she has also co-authored in the section titled ‘Design 

Management in India’ in the Handbook of Design Management, published by Berg Publishers, UK 

in 2011.With a work experience of 24 years, including as a Visiting faculty for Design thinking & 

leadership at Malardalen University, Sweden, she has also conducted courses on Innovation, 

Developed a Multidisciplinary Course on “Smart cities” being offered to the students from all other 

schools under the NMIMS University.Some of her recent achievements include: 

1. Order of Merit award for Academic Program on Smart Cities at the Business World Smart cities 

conclave and awards function in New Delhi on the 21st December 2016. 

2. Kyoto Design Lab Innovation Prize – The Team won the first prize For Developing a low-cost 

product to help manage ‘Freezing’ in a Parkinson’s disease patient, at the 24hr design challenge 

in July 2015 at the Design4Health conference held at Sheffield Hallam University, England. 

Rohan Arora is a final year student at MPSTME, NMIMS Mumbai 

with specialization in marketing. He has worked as a marketing intern 

in the education sector as a consultant for BFSI, Media and FMCG 

industries. He has been a keen participant in various paper presentation 

events at various colleges and has won a first prize at a paper 

presentation event at PICT, Pune. His research interests includes in 

the areas of technology management, impact of technology on 

consumers, training and development and Advertising. 

Kriti Dua is a final year student at MPSTME, NMIMS Mumbai. Her 

inspiration in life has been by her love, zest and respect for business 

and technology. She has an innate belief in technology’s ability to 

prove as a vital tool in the advancement and development of the 

society, which if utilized and managed properly with correct intentions 

and expertise, will lead to the fulfillment of her dream. With this aim 

in life she is aspiring to be a Techo-Manager and currently pursuing 

the flagship course MBA (TECH.) EXTC with Marketing as 



6319

ISSN: 2347-1697 




management major, at MPSTME, NMIMS. She is also an active member of placement committee at 

MPSTME Placement cell. Kriti has worked as a Marketing intern with a reputed fashion e- 

commerce start-up located in Bangalore in 2016. Apart from that she has received a job offer for 

Business Analyst profile at Idea Cellular through campus placement. Her research interests include 

understanding of consumer’s buying behaviour, product development, branding, business 

management and media planning. 

Meryl Cherian is a MBA(Tech) management student in NMIMS- 

MPSTME, Mumbai majoring in Marketing and Electronics & 

Telecommunication. She has recently been placed with Directi 

through campus and has additionally undertaken short internships in 

the areas of consulting, sales, digital marketing, social media, 

networking and technology transitions in data centres. She has 

represented her college in numerous business plan competitions and 

has been the college ambassador for the Entrepreneurship Cell, IIT 

Bombay from the period 2014-2015. Meryl hails for Bombay and 

intends to make her career in the new and emerging Fintech industry, 

in marketing and strategy planning. She is an active social volunteer 

and has worked with an award winning NGO Me2Green in the areas of sustainability. She is 

currently volunteering with Teach for India to help underprivileged kids achieve educational equity. 


Agarwal, A. , Arora, R. , Dua, K. , Cherian, M. (2017) :: “Future of Robotics in 

Banking” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347- 

1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6297-6320, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/059 



6320

www.ijifr.com 



Scientific Attitude among Tribal Students at 



Key Words 

Tribal communities- Muthuvan, Uraly, Scientific Attitude 

Laly K. P. 

Senior Research Fellow 

School of Pedagogical Sciences 

Mahatma Gandhi University, Kottayam-Kerala 

Abstract 

Modern education fails to maintain its quality to preserve the dignity of 

forest culture. The sustainable methodology adopted recently focuses the 

importance of maintaining Earth in its purified state. Tribals, a group of 

human-beings who enjoys and protects earths culture has now been 

undergone a drastic change and now the life of Earth become a question 

mark. To develop sustainable future and to preserve Earth’s treasure 

scientific attitude will play a greater role. Thus this study focused to find out 

the scientific attitude scientific attitude among tribal students at elementary 

level of Idukki district. This study focused only on the Muthuvan and Uraly 

community of Idukki district. A normative survey was conducted among 70 

elementary level tribal students from the Model Residential Schools under 

Scheduled Tribe Development Department, Kerala state government at 

Idukki district, Kerala India. 

I. INTRODUCTION: THE JOURNEY OF BANKING 

Always a tribal economy is characterized by the close relationship of the tribal economy is 

characterized by the close relationship of tribal community with the habitat or natural 

environment associated with or in other words tribal people are associated with forest 

economy. Tribal people are intimate friends of nature, protects earth, biosphere etc which is 

necessary for all the humans for their survival. The numerous requirements of the tribal 

community are highly satisfied with the simplest instruments from the area they inhabitat. 

The primary source of food for tribal are only from the flora and fauna of the habitat they 

survive. Attitudes lie in affective domain. Scientific attitude help to understand state of the 

world, one’s responsibility towards the well being of a person and the society. Scientific 

attitude help one to become aware of his/ her environment and its deterioration. Muthuvan 

are found in Idukky and Eranakulam districts. They are believed to be migrated from 

Madurai in Tamil Nadu. Muthuvan are food-gatherers also engage in cultivation especially 

. 



6321

ISSN: 2347-1697 




in cardamom and ginger. Uraly tribe is found in Idukki, Kottayam and Kollam districts. 

Until the recent past, most of them used to live on small huts made on tree tops inside the 

forest. They are engaged in cultivation and collection of forest produces. 

Kothari commission (1964-66) advocates the importance of science education from 

the primary stage up to university stage. It advocates that science education should be an 

integrated part of of school education with a provision of compulsory teaching during the 

first ten years of schooling. Thus the development of scientific attitude got an importance 

from the early of school education. A person with scientific attitude will be free from 

prejudice and bias. He has logical thinking and reasoning power. He can make his society 

developed. He can sustain valuable and scientifically proven values and cultures to make his 

society, identified by others. He cannot believe anything without a clear cut evidences. 

Thus it is a matter of being objectives is his observation and thinking. Tribal population, 

habitants of interiors of forest have many belief and cultures. Many of the original values 

and vultures belongs to them are on the point of extinct. Inculcation and enhancement of 

scientific attitude will help to prevent this type of extinction of their purity and originality in 

a great extent. If a person or a student becomes aware of the scientific aspects of their 

culture and tradition he/ she can make the society aware with the scientific value and can be 

practiced further. With this light in mind investigator tries to find out the scientific attitude 

among the tribal students at elementary level. 

II. OBJECTIVES 

1. To find out the scientific attitude among tribal students at elementary level of Idukki 

district 


district based on gender. 


district based on community. 

4. To find out whether the scientific attitude among tribal students at elementary level of 

Idukki district differ based on gender and community. 

III. METHODOLOGY 

A normative survey was conducted among 70 elementary level tribal students from the 

Model Residential Schools under scheduled tribe development department, Kerala state 

government at Idukki district, Kerala India. A Scientific attitude scale was used for the 

study. Computation of percentages and Descriptive statistics were performed as a part of 

statistical data analysis of the present study. 

IV. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION 

To find out the scientific attitude among elementary tribal students at Idukki district 

Elementary school tribal students were classified based on the scores as High, Average and 

Low in their scientific attitude as shown in Table 1. 

Laly K. P. :: Scientific Attitude among Tribal Students at 


6322

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Table 1: Classification of elementary school tribal students based on total score 

Variable Group Score % Of 

Elementary 

School 

Tribal 

Students 

Scientific 

Attitude 

High 

Average 

Low 

( Mean+ Sd) = 28 And Above 

(Between Mean+Sd And Mean-Sd = 28-22 

(Mean –Sd) = 22 And Below 

From Table 1 it is clear that 20% of elementary school tribal students come under the group 

with a high scientific attitude, majority of them 56% are with average and 24% are low in 

scientific attitude. 1.4.2. To find out the scientific attitude among tribal students at 

elementary level of Idukki distrcict based on gender done by grouping them as high average 

and low in terms of scientific attitude. Table.2 shows the details. 

Table 2: Classification of elementary tribal students based on gender 

variable group Sub - 

group 

Scientific 

attitude 

Boys 

Girls 

High 

Average 

Low 

High 

Average 

Low 

score 

( mean+ SD) = 25 and 

above 

(between mean+SD 

and mean-SD = 25-22 

(mean –SD) = 22 and 

Below 

( mean+ SD) = 29 and 

above 

(between mean+SD 

and mean-SD = 29-23 

20 

56 

24 

% of elementary 

school tribal students 

18.4 

63.2 

18.4 

(mean –SD) = Below 

Table shows that among boys 18.4% come under group with high scientific attitude, an 

average group constitute 63.2% and only 18.4% fall under low group. Among girls 21% 

come under high group 50% come under average group 29% come under low group. 1.4.3. 

To find out the scientific attitude among tribal students at elementary level of Idukki district 

based on community. 

Table.3. Classification of tribal students at elementary level of Idukki district based on 

community 

Variable Group Sub - 

Group 

Scientific 

attitude 

Muthuvan 

High 

Average 

Low 

21 

50 

Score % Of 

Elementar 

y School 

Tribal 

Students 

( mean+ SD) = 26 and above 

22 

(between mean+ SD and mean-SD) = 60 

26-23 

18 

(mean –SD) = 23 and below 

29 



6323

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Uraly 

High 

Average 

Low 

( mean+ SD) = 29 and above 

(between mean+ SD and mean-SD) = 

29-23 

(mean –SD) = 23 and Below 

18 

53 

29 

1.4.4. To find out whether the scientific attitude among tribal students at elementary level of 

Idukki district differ based on gender and community. The analysis was done using‘t’ test. 

The details are given below 

Table 4: Test of significance of the difference between tribal students at elementary level of 

Idukki district based on gender and community 

Groups Subgroups No Of Mean SD CR 

Elementary 

School Tribal 

Students 

Gender Boys 38 

25.03 3.23 0.122 

Girls 52 

24.94 3.23 

Community Muthuvan 

Uraly 

45 

45 

26.20 

23.76 

2.95 

3.02 

3.89 

The mean and standard deviation of scientific attitude among tribal boys elementary level 

are 25.03 and 3.23 and those tribal girls at elementary level are 24.94 and 3.23 respectively. 

The critical ratio obtained is 0.122 which is lower than the value set for significance, i.e., 

2.58 at 0.01 levels and 1.96 at 0.05 levels. It indicates that there is no significant difference 

between the scientific attitude among boys and girls of tribal student’s at elementary level. 

The mean and standard deviation of scientific attitude in elementary school tribal 

students of Muthuvan community are26.20 and 2.95 and that of Uraly community are 23.76 

and 3.02 respectively. The critical ratio obtained is 3.89 which is higher than the value set 

for significance, i.e., 2.58 at 0.01 levels and 1.96 at 0.05 levels. It indicates that there is 

significant difference between the scientific attitudes among tribal students belongs to the 

two communities. Also from the mean score it is clear that students belong to the Muthuvan 

community has higher scientific attitude than that of students belong to the Uraly 

community. 

V. CONCLUSION 

Education plays a major role in enlightening and improving the society and its quality. 

Advancement in technological aspects causes a drastic change in the pattern of life. 

Maintaining reasonable change induces sustaining values and tradition. Aware of scientific 

aspects of each will help to establish the identity of the nation and the society.The present 

study found its result as the scientific attitude among the tribal students at elementary level 

got an average level of scientific attitude. They are to be trained to enhance their scientific 

attitude to make and aware their identity in culture and tradition. There lies a need to check 

for the scientific aspects of the tradition and culture prevailed in their community, so that 



6324

ISSN: 2347-1697 




they can maintain their culture with its purity even though they collapse with other 

communities. 


1. Vinod ,K . S., Ajay , K . S., & Anita ,G . ( 2016) .A study of the relationship between scientific 

attitude and academic achievement of rural area's intermediate college girls (science stream only). 

International Journal of Applied Research; 2(4): 46-49. 

http://www.allresearchjournal.com/archives/2016/vol2issue4/PartA/2-3-75.pdf. 

2. Manashee, G., & Devajyoti, G. Scientific attitude of the tea tribe’s secondary school students of 

tinsukia district of Assam. 

3. http://www.srjis.com/pages/pdfFiles/14682375519%20Dr.%20Manashee%20Gogoi.pdf 

4. Best, J.W., & Khan, J.V. (2007). Research in education. (10th ed.) New Delhi: Prentice Hall of 

India. 

5. Garret, H.E. (1981). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Bombay: Vakils, Feffer and Simons 

Ltd. 

6. Vidyarthi, L.P..(1985). Tribal culture of India. Concept publishing company: New Delhi 


Laly, K. P. (2017) :: “Scientific Attitude among Tribal Students at Elementary Level 

of Idukki District” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 

2347-1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6321-6325, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/060 



6325

www.ijifr.com 



Streamlining of Processes & Integration of 

Customer Requirements in Engine 

Production using Quality Gate Methodology 


Key Words 

Mix Model Assembly Lines, Quality Gate, Defect & Cost Reduction 

Mechanical 

Engineering 

1 st Supriya Darekar 

2 nd D. V. Pendam 


Department of Mechanical Engineering 

Bharati vidyapeeth college of Engineering & 

Technology, Kolhapur- Maharashtra 


Department of Production Engineering 

Veermata Jijabai Technological Institute 

Matunga, Mumbai-Maharashtra 

Abstract 

Concept of mass production plays vital role in industrial revolution, such 

systems when employed for production of complex products consisting 

number of sub parts usually by assembling together called as assembly 

lines. In a factory rather than having one assembly line, many auxiliary 

assembly lines are employed, which feds sub-assemblies to the "main" 

assembly line. Engine production in automotive industry is one of the 

complex production systems which require manufacturing and assembly of 

wide variety of components and varied product mix. Mix model type 

parallel assembly line for engine production was found as strong candidate 

for improvement in performance, particularly in the terms of quality, 

ergonomics, safety, and overall operating procedures at TATA Motors Pune. 

Defect identified in line was found not only related with one part or one 

process but in numbers of parts or processes considering variety product 

mix, therefore implementation of six sigma and other Quality methodologies 

to each and everyone was quite difficult. Thus concept of Quality Gates has 

been selected. In this, process must be broken into several distinct phases 

then checkpoints placed between them. Implementation of Quality gate 

concept contains problem definition, Sufficiency Criteria, quality gate 

structuring, benchmark refinement, quality gate milestone, implementation, 

release & operation. This methodology benefited in terms of minimizing 

. 



6326

ISSN: 2347-1697 




project risk through phase-by-phase checklists, reduction of cycle time and 

complexity in planning and control, and improved participation of key 

stakeholders in Q-gate certifications to manage their expectations. In this 

paper structuring and implementation of quality methodology called 

quality gates to accommodate customer requirements in mixed assembly 

line of automobile industry is discussed. 


Mass production was popularized in the 1920s by Henry Ford's Ford Motor Company, 

which introduced electric motors to the then-well-known technique of chain or sequential 

production which was traditionally used in abattoir. The set up of firm was consisting of no. 

of machine tools. These machine tools were arranged systematically in the production flow 

and some had special carriages for rolling heavy items into machining position. Production 

of the Ford Model T used 32,000 machine tools. After the introduction of various 

production methodologies like assembly lines popularized its use in various mass 

production facilities especially automotive industries. Increase in production capabilities 

encouraged competition in the automotive market. Thus the focus of the manufacturing lines 

shifted from quantity to quality of the product. Various market researchers pointed out those 

more satisfied customers boost reputation of Brand Company represents. Various quality 

tools were implemented to actively control rejection in production lines but somehow the 

quality tools doesn’t seemed to be connected to customer satisfaction and provided the 

flexibility to choose the importance of the corrective step on final product. Whether in a 

Management or Operating Process, a Quality Gate is a control or decision point where a 

number of Outputs of the process are checked against a pre-defined set of Requirements. 

The process is not meant to continue down its normal path if the predefined Requirements 

are not met.Quality gate methodology is rather a reactive measure to the problem defined 

but proved to be the link between customer and company improving customer participation 

in the production process. In this paper the applications of quality gate methodology and its 

effectiveness in changing environments of engine production line at Tata Motors, Pune. 

Mixed model assembly lines complicate the application of Quality gate methodology at Tata 

motors, Pune. The various service issues such as leakages, broken parts, etc were 

documented per thousand incidents and then chosen as candidate for improvement. Removal 

of these defects means increased customer satisfaction. 


The problem discussed was with production line at Tata Motors, Pune. The assembly line 

was mixed model type so in order to address the issue it is important to understand more 

about production lines. 

2.1 Mixed Model Assembly line: 

Mixed-model production is the production of a wide range of product models using a certain 

degree of shared resources and common material. It is commonly accepted that modern 

manufacturing places a greater pressure on producers for more choice in the product 

Supriya Darekar, D. V. Pendam :: Streamlining of Processes & 

Integration of Customer Requirements in Engine Production 

using Quality Gate Methodology 

6327

ISSN: 2347-1697 




offering. [1] Products are increasingly assembled from standard components and subassemblies, 

using machines and automated systems as well as manual labour. A production 

schedule based on MRP will tend to cope with high product mix by allocating each model to 

a multiple of a shift or a day. This means that the whole product mix is supplied across a 

scheduling cycle of a multiple of weeks. 

2.2 Quality Gate Methodology: 

A powerful management tool, the ‘Quality Gates’ Method was developed and christened by 

PROsys, LLC. It has already been successfully applied in a number of different industries, 

companies and cultures to: 

• Improve performance of projects and processes by managing their Inputs and Outputs. 

• Assure that Outputs meet pre-defined management, business and customer Requirements. 

(Products and Services of a specified Quality level) 

• Reduce Cost, Cycle Time and Effort normally consumed by the process. (Often, in 

reworking non-Quality Products or fixing unsatisfactory Outputs) 

The technique has proven particularly useful for managing the outputs of such intuitive and 

complex processes as research and development in the IT, automotive and pharmaceutical 

industries. 

Types of Quality Gates: 

Whether in a Management or Operating Process, a Quality Gate is a control or decision 

point where a number of Outputs of the process are checked against a pre-defined set of 

Requirements. The process is not meant to continue down its normal path if the predefined 

Requirements are not met. 

• At the operating level, Quality Control Gates are established for monitoring the quality of 

performance and outputs within operations processes. 

• At the management level, Quality Management Gates are created for making decisions 

which will impact the outcomes of a strategy, project or program. 

Quality Management Gates: At the Management Level (Departmental and Senior), targets 

(such as acceptable resource levels), timeframes and deadlines are fixed for the Project or 

Initiative. A Quality Management Gate is positioned at each major deadline or target. 

Specific products or results are generated within each defined timeframe. Requirements are 

defined for these specified Outputs. Outputs and performance are monitored and decisions 

made to assure alignment between performance and expectations. 

Quality Control Gates: At the Operations level, the Business Process is broken into activity 

areas. A Quality Control Gate is positioned at the end of specific activities or steps. Specific 

products are generated through the activity or step. Requirements are defined for the specific 

products. The products are monitored, and anomalies are reported or corrected within 

operations. 

The ‘products’ listed below will provide a firm foundation for implementing the 

Quality Gates Method: 

• Agreed quality criteria for executive, departmental and operations level products, outputs 

and activities. 




6328

ISSN: 2347-1697 




• Policy decisions by management that assure the application of the method. 

• Collectable metrics for ascertaining the level of success of the program and of performance 

within operations. 

These products are developed, initiated and confirmed through four Quality Gate 

Implementation phases. 

Phase 1: Set Up the Gates 

•Define the quality criteria and Quality Management Gates for managing program or project 

quality. 

•Identify and link potential quality improvement needs. 

•Carry out a working session with the Management Team to: 

1. Develop understanding: 

Present and confirm the Quality Gates Method 

2. Gain acceptance: 

• Agree on the approach 

• Confirm targets and deadlines 

3. Anchor commitment: 

• Identify specific Performance or Quality goals / expectations / requirements 

• Agree / validate the Program plan, schedule, roles and responsibilities 

• Assign resources: Select a Steering Committee and assign resources 

• Communicate decisions from the Management Team Working Session. 

• Prepare training for the Project or Program Team members. 

Phase 2: Train the Project or Program Team Members 

•Explain goals, structure and planning. 

•Confirm expectations. 

•Present and demonstrate tools and methods to be applied. 

Phase 3: Apply the Method 

• Carry out scheduled Quality Management Gate progress / decision meetings to. 

• Validate and evaluate performance and outputs of the program or project. 

• Confirm the respect of defined quality criteria. 

• Identify needed management decisions, and make them. 

• Define corrective action plans and responsibilities. 

• Document solutions. 

Phase 4: Implement the Corrective Actions 

• Implement 

• Measure Improvements/Progress 

• Adjust the solutions or make changes to the process / resources 

• Measure Improvements/Progress 

• Monitor and report Results 

Phase 5: Review and Communicate: 

• Plan and carry out Review Session(s) with managers. 

• Communicate outcomes and results to employees and management. 




6329

ISSN: 2347-1697 




III. IMPLEMENTATION OF QUALITY GATES 

3.1 Understanding the problems: 

While Studying the basics of the mixed model engine assembly line of TML, found that line 

is very intricate & parallel & and then decides to study step by step process of engine or 

station wise study called zero based study. In zero based study planning to collect data from 

worker, supervisor, or helper too. 

3.2 Identify critical processes: 

Setting up of quality gate is a strategic decision as it involves allocation of resources. So 

spending on resources must be justifiable. Thus selection of process which after quality gate 

is to be installed depending upon criticality of the stage which is responsible for the 

subsequent customer satisfaction i.e. field problem as shown in Table 1.criticality of the 

process determined by reviewing product quality standard (PQS) and various station wise 

documents like control plan, process sheet, potential failure mode effect analysis (PFMEA), 

work instruction, voice of customer, quality alert, one point lesson, material complexity 

matrices. 

Table 1: Critical stages of Engine assembly line 

No. Critical Stage Failure Mode Effect 

1 PCN And Bearing Fitment Wrongly/Not Fitted 

Low Oil Pressure, Shell 

Failure 

2 

MB Caps And Oil Pump 

Fitment 

Wrong Fitment 

Oil Seal Leak 

3 Piston Sub Assembly Wrong Fitment Engine Burst 

4 

Cylinder Head Oil Gallery 

Plug Fitment 

Wrong Fitment 

Oil Leakage 

5 

Piston Insertion And Con Wrong Piston Insertion/ 

Rod Torque 

Torque Not Applied 

Engine Burst 

6 

Ladder Frame And Strainer Sealant/ Strainer Not Oil Leakage/ No Oil To 

Fitment 

Applied Properly 

Engine 

7 

Cylinder Head Torquing And Camshaft Timing Wrong/ Engine Noise/ RFF 

Camshaft Fitment 

RFF Position Shift 

Broken 

8 Engine Timing Wrong Timing Timer Belt Failure 

9 

Injector And HP Line 

Noise/Less Load/High 

Loose/ Wrong Fitment 

Fitment 

Fuel Consumption 

10 

Power Steering Pump 

Power Steering 

Wrong Fitment 

Fitment 

Belt/Pulley Failure 

11 Leakage Testing Wrong Inspection Oil/ Coolant Leakage 

12 Clutch Fitment Wrong Fitment Clutch Failure 

13 Cold Testing Wrong Inspection High Rejection 

14 Final Inspection Wrong As Above 

15 

A/C And Power Steering 

Belt/ Timing Belt Fitment 

Loose Fitment 

Belt Failure 

16 Gear Box Wrong Fitment Performance 




6330

ISSN: 2347-1697 




3.3 Identify potential improvement needs: 

After deciding candidates for quality improvement, next step is to identify potential 

improvement needs recognised at critical processes. In order to decide course of action at 

particular station failure modes mentioned in Table 1 are used as benchmark and course of 

action is planned. Each quality gate is characterized by its own entry and exit criteria. A 

typical entry criterion is the completion and baseline of deliverables while an exit criterion 

can be the removal of the identified defects. Solution is devised to prevent each failure 

modes at every process which determines criterion of particular quality gate. By considering 

place of the critical processes in production line total 8 quality gates are installed over main 

assembly line as well two sub assembly lines. Processes are grouped by sequence and 

assemblies subassemblies as follows shown in Figure 1. 

Gate 1: 

Previous process- crankshaft 

dropping 

Location- cylinder block sub 

assembly line. 

Parameters – 

- washing Temp. & Pressure 

& cycle time 

Gate 4: 

Previous process – FIP 

setting 

Location- Main Engine 

assembly line 

Parameters - 

- Cylinder Head dropping 

- Rocker arm assembly 

Gate 2: 

Previous process – Piston & 

connecting rod Fitment 

Location- Piston sub 

assembly line. 

Parameters - 

- Wrong fitment circlips 

- 120° Phasing of piston 

rings 

- Temp. of Furnace 

Gate 5: 

Previous process – Belt 

tension & Leakage testing 


assembly line 

Parameters - 

- Tappet & HP line fitment 

- Turbocharger assembly 

Gate 3: 

Previous process – Piston 

Insertion 


assembly line 

Parameters - 

- Torque applied 

- Proper fitment of asly. 

- AC fitment 

Gate 6: 

Previous process – Final 

Inspection 

Location - Main Engine 

assembly line 


- Wrong fitment 

Gate 7: 

Previous process – Pre – PDI 

stage 

Location – Test Bed 


- Oil filling 

- Performance testing 

- Oil leakages 

Gate 8: 

Previous process – Testing 

Location – Dispatch 


- Proper fitment 

- Proper gear Box selection 

- Painting 

- Oiling level 

Figure 1: Quality gates and their criterion 

3.4 Training of team members: After quality gates are established. The training of team 

members ensures achievement of defined goal of quality exercise. These team members 




6331

ISSN: 2347-1697 




have been realized of the criticality of each station and trained with kaizen, 5S, WCQ- phase 

1 and safety training regimes. Team members are provided with checklists and other quality 

documents to supervise and run quality gates efficiently. This training includes also 

assessment over specific time interval to ensure continuous quality improvement process. 

3.5 Application of method: This method is applied to process, documented in synopsis and 

recorded online in database using various softwares such as MiNT, SAP. Method is 

scrutinised for recurring and new defects and new problems are well defined. 

3.6 Implement the corrective action: 

The defects that are defined in above step are addressed by using Eight 

Discipline (8D) problem solving method and its results are documented as well permanent 

actions are devised. 

3.7 Review and communicate: 

The performance of quality measure taken is analysed on field using various charts. 

The components are tracked for recurring of similar defects addressed by Quality gate 

methodology. The service issues are analysed from various documents like IPTV chart 

(incidents per thousand vehicles) to ensure better customer satisfaction. 

IV. CONCLUSIONS 

The optimisation of engineering systems within industrial settings is a key element in 

achieving and surpassing production and other organisational goals. In this paper, a case 

Study was successfully presented, based within the automotive industry at TML, Pune. The 

method applied resulted increased customer satisfaction by eradicating various field 

complaints through controlling quality of the production line using quality gates. The 

method showed good results to address various field complaints such as Leakages, Broken 

parts taken for study. Consequently, it can be concluded that significant gains can be 

achieved through a structured approach of analysing production lines and applying sound 

engineering knowledge and formulating applicable solutions. Implementation of Quality 

gates proved to be useful tool in improving participation of key stakeholders i.e. the 

customer and manage their expectations. 

V. REFERENCES 

[1] D. Townsend et al “Development of a station control system for engine assembly line” CIE 42 

Proceedings, 16-18 July 2012, Cape Town, South Africa © 2012 CIE & SAII 229-1 

[2] Rekiek, B., Dolgui, A., Delchambre, A. & Bratcu, A. 2002. “State of art of optimization 

methods for assembly line design”, Annual Reviews in Control, 26(2002), pp 163-174. 

[3] Journal of Information Technology Management Volume XXII, Number 1, 2011 

[4] Proceedings of the 2009 Winter Simulation Conference M. D. Rossetti, R. R. Hill, B. Johansson, 

A. Dunkin and R. G. Ingalls, eds. 

[5] R. de Jong / “Designing mixed-model assembly lines” (2009) 

[6] Alizon, F., S. B. Shooter, et al. (2009). "Henry Ford and the Model T: lessons for product 

platforming and mass customization." Design Studies. 

[7] Chase, R.B. and Aquilano, N.J. 1995. Production and Operations Management. (7th ed), New 

York: Irwin Publishers 




6332

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[8] Nazneen, Karmali. “Businessman of the year 1988: Sumantra Moolgaokar,” Business India, 26th 

December 1988 – 8th January 1989, p-54. 

[9] Surender T. “Telco’s Big Bet,” Business World, 7th July 2003.Joseph, Lancelot. “Fasten your 

seatbelts,” Business India, 19th January 2004 – 1st February 2004, pp. 48-54. 


Darekar,S., Pendam, D. V. (2017) :: “Streamlining of Processes & Integration of 

Customer Requirements in Engine Production using Quality Gate Methodology” 

International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347-1697), Vol. 4 

No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6326-6333, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/009 




6333

www.ijifr.com 



Review of Challenges Faced by Global 

Expatriates and Onsite Project Employees in their 

Host Countries and at Time of Repatriation 


Key Words 

Adjustment, Cultural Shock, Expatriation, Repatriation, Turnover Rate 

Human 

Resources 

1 st Preeti Chaudhary Student 

2 nd Harman Singh 

Symboisis Institute of Management Studies 


3 rd Dr. Suruchi Pandey 

Associate Professor 

Symboisis Institute of Management Studies 


Abstract 

This research focuses on the challenges faced by the expatriates and the 

employees sent for onsite projects in their host countries and the issues faced 

during their repatriation. This paper also focuses to bring out the factors 

which affect their selection to send them abroad for work by the 

organisation. As we introduced the main concept of expatriation, measures 

taken by HR department of the host company to look into compensation 

strategies, performance appraisal and overall cultural adjustments has also 

been found out through survey. At the end, paper also helps to know the 

repatriation practices followed by the organisations. The dissertation work 

uses a primary survey to collect data. On the basis of the primary research, 

conclusions were drawn. The dissertation is concluded with a list of the 

specific problems and new challenges were found which was recommended 

for further research. 


In the present context, being successful in the domestic market for an organisation is far 

from enough. Now because of porous borders and globalization, investments and mergers 

and acquisition have increased. Due to these activities, brainstorm new ways to remain 

competitive and sustain them globally. There is an increasing necessity to transfer skills and 

knowledge. With this, expatriation and on site managers have become an essential part of 

multinational companies, their management success in the global market. 

. 



6334

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Expatriation can be defined as “the process of sending managers to another country to run a 

subsidiary of a multinational organization. Before departure, the process should include an 

extensive period of training to ensure that the managers are familiar with difference of 

cultural , and to reduce the possibility of culture shock” (Dictionary of Human Resource 

Management 2001, p. 120). After completing their international assignment, the expatriates 

return to their home countries and then the process of repatriation begins. Keeping in mind 

that companies are spending a massive amount on their expatriates, on an average it costs 

two to three times more than having the same employee working in his home country, the 

repatriation process has to be studied carefully (Black and Grierson 1999). Several 

researchers have showed that companies normally seem to underestimate the repatriation 

process because of the impression that employees are returning to a familiar set up. (Stroh et 

al. 1998; Adler 1981; Tung 1997). 

The process of re-entry of individuals after their assignment is called repartition. This 

requires adjustment back to the home environment. Research points out, this becomes often 

more severe. Many organisations are not prepared for this and often overlook it. There is an 

initial period of high and calm, slowly the expectations do not get met. Then occurs a 

reverse culture shock. 

Companies propose a unique repatriation process to their employee. Useful in many ways, 

which is a good initiative to make the returnees ready and the family members about various 

challenges they are going to face. This is mostly done through counselling sessions, 

discussions, handbooks, seminars and feedback sessions. This helps the repatriates to adjust 

as soon as possible with minimum difficulty. A syndrome which most repatriates suffer 

from is called out of sight, out of mind syndrome. Information shared to the employees and 

their families is about: 

• Cultural shock that they are going to face; 

• Social, economic and political changes that they will face; 

• Environment of the business; 

• Financial review plan: 

• Children’s school education; 

• Job search to help the spouse 

II. OBJECTIVE OF THE RESEARCH 

To determine the challenges faced by global expatriates and onsite employees in their host 

countries and at time of repatriation. Factors affecting selection of expatriate and employees 

for onsite project by the organisation. Measures taken by HR department of Host Company 

to look into compensation strategies, performance appraisal and overall cultural 

adjustments. To determine repatriation practices followed by the organisations. 

III. LIMITATIONS OF THE RESEARCH 

The study is limited to Indian expats and employees going for an onsite project abroad only. 

Sample size is comparative smaller (119 employees) since researchers could not reach out 

Preeti Chaudhary, Harman Singh, Dr. Suruchi Pandey :: Review 

of Challenges Faced by Global Expatriates and Onsite Project 

Employees in their Host Countries and at Time of Repatriation 

6335

ISSN: 2347-1697 




too many managers, employees and professionals working in the company. Employees did 

not disclose their compensation figures. 

IV. METHODOLOGY ADOPTED 

The information gathered for carry out the dissertation is based on 2 sources: primary and 

secondary. The primary data was gathered through a set of questionnaire that was circulated 

to 152 employees. The secondary data focused on information found in academic journals 

and through internet, books and dictionaries which is related to the topic chosen. The 

selections of sample include employees and managers responses. The total size of the 

sample was 119 respondents. The study is limited to MNCs and government employees and 

armed forces only. Survey administration period was April 1, 2016 to June 16, 2016. 

Researchers used google document for getting responses. Tables and graphs has been the 

source of comparison of data. 

V. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS OF SURVEY ON EXPATRIATE EMPLOYEES 

The result of the research has been presented through tables below: 

Table 1: Demographic profile of the respondents 

Sl. No. Demographic profile N=119 (%) 

1. Age (in years) 

a. 25-35 101 84 

b. 36-46 15 13 

c. Less than 25 3 3 

2. Gender 

a. Male 88 74 

b. Female 31 26 

3. Marital status 

a. Married 71 60 

b. Single 48 40 

Discussion: 

1. Age: It can be observed from the Table 1 that the population was divided into three 

age brackets. It includes respondents in the age group of 25-35 years (84%), 36-46 

years (13%) and the age of less than 25 years (3%). 

2. Gender: It can be seen that 74% of the respondents were males and 26 % were 

females. 

3. Marital status: It can be inferred that 60% of the respondents were married and 40 

% were single. 

Table 2: Place of host country of the employee 

SL. No. Country N=119 % 

1 United States of America 22 18 

2 United Kingdom 11 9 




6336

ISSN: 2347-1697 




3 Australia 10 8 

4 China 10 8 

5 Singapore 7 6 

6 Vietnam 6 5 

7 Canada 5 4 

8 France 5 4 

9 Germany 4 3 

10 Kuwait 4 3 

11 Luxemburg 3 3 

12 Malaysia 3 3 

13 New Zealand 3 3 

14 Peru 3 3 

15 South Africa 3 3 

16 India 2 2 

17 Italy 2 2 

18 Spain 2 2 

19 United Arab Emirates 2 2 

20 Zimbabwe 2 2 

21 Botswana 1 1 

22 Congo 1 1 

23 Czech Republic 1 1 

24 Hungary 1 1 

25 Kenya 1 1 

26 New York 1 1 

27 Qatar 1 1 

28 Russia 1 1 

29 South Sudan 1 1 

30 Sydney 1 1 

Discussion: From table 2, it is evident that maximum (18%) employee’s host company was 

United States of America, followed by (9%) of employees was of United Kingdom and 8% 

was for China and Australia and so on. 

Table 3: Location of the parent company of the employee 

S. No. Company N=119 % 

1 India 103 86 

2 Malaysia 1 1 

3 Singapore 2 2 

4 South Africa 5 4 

5 Sweden 3 3 

6 United States of America 5 4 




6337

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Discussion: From table 3, we can infer that maximum respondent’s parent country was 

India followed by South Africa and USA (4%), Sweden (3%) and from Singapore (2%). 

Majority of respondents were from Infosys, Wipro, TCS, Ericsson and Vodafone. 

Table 4: Previous international experience with employee 

S. No. Experience N=119 % 

1 Yes 86 72 

2 No 33 28 

Discussion: From the table 4, we can find that 72% of responders has international exposure 

before becoming expats while 28% of responders were made expats without international 

exposure due to their competencies and commitment towards work. 

Table 5: Factors focused by the company while selecting for an expatriate role 

S. No. Factors N=119 % 

1 Knowledge and Competencies 94 79 

2 Both Mobility and Knowledge and Competencies 25 21 

3 Years of the association with the company 0 0 

4 Mobility 0 0 

5 Both Years of the association with the company and Mobility 0 0 

6 Both Knowledge and Competencies and Years of the association 0 0 

with the company 

Discussion: From the table 5, we can conclude that majorly companies look for knowledge 

and competencies (79%) for an expatriate role, followed by 21% of years of association 

with the company and also knowledge and competencies. 

Table 6: Factors considered by company while sending an employee for expat program 

S. No. Factors N=119 % 

1 Knowledge transfer and training 64 54 

2 To expand market (customer base) 40 34 

3 To offer expertise 15 12 

Discussion: From table 6, we can infer that companies largely send their employees for 

knowledge transfer and training (54%) so that they can help the team to face the VUCA 

world, while 34% of the companies send their employees to other countries to expand the 

market and 12% of employees were sent to offer expertise. 

Table 7: Kind of training is given or imparted for taking up an expat role by a host 

company 

S. No. Training N=119 % 

1 Cultural 14 12 

2 Lifestyle 18 15 

3 Technical knowledge and technology 

relevant to region 

81 68 




6338

ISSN: 2347-1697 




4 Managerial 0 0 

5 All of the above 6 5 

Discussion: From table 7, it was found that host companies have emphasised on imparting 

training related to technical knowledge and technology relevant to region (68%) were 

employees will be working, followed by training on lifestyle (15% of employees have 

received) for the host country and 12% of employees were trained about the culture of the 

country, and 5% of employees have received training on all the parameters so that they 

settle their comfortably and adapt to the change. 

Table 8: Expatriate training takes place 

S. No. Training Occur N=119 % 

1 As part of the assignment 76 64 

2 Before commencement of expatriation 43 36 

Discussion: From the interview, researcher got to know that 64% of employees said that 

their company focuses on expatriation training as part of the assignment while 36% 

employees says their company has trained them before commencement of expatriation 

which shows that company focuses on the employee’s welfare and making him comfortable 

at workplace. 

Table 9: Measures taken by Host Company in helping the employee to adjust: 

S. No. Measures N=119 % 

1 Adjustment in work and work culture 52 44 

2 Adjustment in accommodation and living 53 45 

3 Adjustment in networking 0 0 

4 Adjustment to the local culture and norms of the society 0 0 

5 All of the above 14 11 

Discussion: From table 9, we can infer that 45% of the employees says that measures taken 

by the host company is in adjustment in accommodation and living for the expats, while 

44% says that their company help in adjustment in work and work culture and 11% 

employees get help in above adjustments along with building network and adjusting local 

culture and norms of the society. 

Table 10: Measures taken by Host Company to adjust the family to the new 

environment 

Sl. No. Help by company in family adjustment N=119 % 

1 No help 89 75 

2 Family Setup 6 5 

3 Indian family socialization 6 5 

4 Schools for kids, visa for parents 6 5 

5 Accommodation, transportation 3 3 

6 Contacts, accommodation, medical facilities 3 3 




6339

ISSN: 2347-1697 




7 Family get together 3 3 

8 Accommodation 2 2 

9 Sponsor visas 1 1 

Discussion: From table 10, we can infer that 75% of employees have not received any 

assistance from the host country’s company in adjusting the family in the new environment. 

5% employees says the host company has helped in family set up while 5% says that the 

company has helped in Indian family socialization and get together so that they could adjust 

well. And so on. 

Table 11: Performance appraisal fall under ambit of HR department in Host Company 

or Parent Company 

S. No. Performance Appraisal is by N=119 % 

1 Parent Company 75 63 

2 Host Company 44 37 

Discussion: In above table 11, it can be concluded that 37% employees says that their 

performance appraisal is done by the host company while 63% employees says that it is 

done by parent company. 

Table 12: Expatriate compensation strategies used by company 

S. No. Compensation Strategy N=119 % 

1 Home country based 37 31 

2 Headquarter based 35 29 

3 International pay structures 21 18 

4 Localization 13 11 

5 Lump sum approaches 13 11 

Discussion: From table 12, it can be evident that 31% employees have said that their 

company compensates them on home country based, 20% says by headquarter based, 18% 

says the company pays according to international pay structures while 11% of employees 

get compensation according to localization and other 11% get through lump sum approach. 

Table 13: Company specify the date of returning from the assignment before an 

employee leaves 

S. No. Date of returning is specified N=119 % 

1 Yes 81 68 

2 No 38 32 

Discussion: From above table 13, it can be said that 68% of employees gets the date of 

returning from assignment while 32% employees are not told about their returning dates. 

Table 14: Average tenure of expatriation practiced by the company 

S. No. Average tenure of expatriation N=119 % 

1 Less than 1 year 52 44 

2 1-2 years 36 30 




6340

ISSN: 2347-1697 




3 More than 3 years 31 26 

4 2-3 years 0 0 

Discussion: From above table 14, it is seen that 44% of employees have average tenure of 

expatriation is of less than 1 year, 30% had 1 to 2 years while 26% employees have worked 

for more than 3 years. 

Table 15: Repatriation practices followed by the company 

Sl. No. Repatriation Practices N=119 % 

1 No idea about repatriation practice 20 17 

2 Strategic approach 19 16 

3 Post assignment review 12 10 

4 Project based 12 10 

5 Protecting from culture shock 12 10 

6 No specific strategy 11 9 

7 No policy 7 6 

8 Familiarisation with companies and colleagues 6 5 

9 flexible career placement 6 5 

10 Repatriation program provision 6 5 

11 Protecting from culture shock 3 3 

12 Repatriation training 4 3 

13 

An employee must return to the host country once within 3 

months. 1 1 

Discussion: From table 15, we intended to ask the repatriation practices followed by their 

home companies for the repatriates. And we got to know that 17% of the employees says 

they don’t know about such practice. Whereas 16% companies follow strategic approach of 

repatriation while 10% of employees say they have to undergo post assignment review. 

Table 16: Company assures an incremental pay/ position post repatriation 

Sl. No. 

Assurance by company for incremental 

pay/position post repatriation 

N=119 % 

1 Yes 64 54 

2 No 55 46 

Discussion: From table 16, we have found that 54% of the company give incremental 

pay/positions to the repatriates while 46% doesn’t. 

Table 17: Advice for HR departments about handling expatriates by employees 

S. No. Advice to HR Department N=119 % 

1 Clarifying the objectives of project 32 27 

2 Environment conditioning 20 17 

3 Work life balance for expats 19 16 

4 Follow up on job satisfaction 11 9 

5 HR exposure on handling expats 9 8 




6341

ISSN: 2347-1697 




6 Connecting with previous expats for experience sharing 7 6 

7 Organising family get together 7 6 

8 Collaborative approach 3 3 

9 Cross cultural training 3 3 

10 Handling repatriation effectively 3 3 

11 Identifying potential expats 3 3 

12 Addressing grievances 2 2 

Discussion: From table 17, we can find some advises by the employees to HR department 

for handling expats. 27% of employees have said that HR should clarify the objectives of 

the project while 17% employees says that HR should assist in conditioning the expats to 

the environment they are going to. While 16% employees say HR should help in work life 

balance. 

Table 18: Important learnings of employees in first six months of expatriations 

Sl. No. Learnings by Expats in first six months N=119 % 

1 Culture handling 14 12 

2 To be punctual 11 9 

3 Sustainability 10 8 

4 Professionalism 9 8 

5 Flexibility 7 6 

6 The difference in social and work culture 7 6 

7 New working style 6 5 

8 Openness 6 5 

9 Be yourself 5 4 

10 Communication Strategy 5 4 

11 Cooperation 5 4 

12 Health issues 5 4 

13 New situations 5 4 

14 New legal challenges 4 3 

15 New Work life balance 4 3 

16 To be professional 3 3 

17 To be socially active 3 3 

18 Cope up with office politics 2 2 

19 Networking 2 2 

20 Work life balance 2 2 

21 Humour 1 1 

22 Managing things 1 1 

23 Socially Active 1 1 

24 Stringent laws and regulations 1 1 




6342

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Discussion: From table 18, we found that 12% of employees have learned in first six 

months how to handle culture on their own. 9% of them learned to be punctual while 8% 

learned to be sustainable. 

Table 19: Challenges faced by Expats 

Sl. No. Challenges faced by Expats N=119 

1 Knowledge, experience, skills 14 

2 Local Adjustments 14 

3 Safety and Security, Language Barrier, 13 

4 Money - finances and health care, Loneliness , Homesickness 12 

5 Socially Inactive, Money, Safety 12 

6 Socially active, Local Adjustments 10 

7 Climatic Conditions 7 

8 Language Barrier, Homesickness, Money - Currency problems 7 

9 Relationship problems, Local Adjustments, Loneliness 6 

10 Cultural Differences, Safety and Security , Local Adjustments 5 

11 Healthcare, Money , Safety 5 

12 Increased Cost of Living, Safety, Climatic Conditions 5 

13 Language barrier 4 

14 Government Rules and regulations, Language, Homesickness 2 

15 Relationship problems, Finances, Homesickness 1 

16 Safety, Money ,Bureaucracy 1 

17 Skills, Knowledge, Stress 1 

Discussion: From table 19, we tried to figure out what were the challenges faced by the 

expats. 14% employees says that knowledge of the domain, their experience and the skills 

set required were the greatest challenge for them to work in new environment. While 14% 

of them said that for them local adjustment was the major challenge. 


The challenges brought out were of wide variety and purpose, each highlighted by the 

respondents understanding and opinion. Some of the major challenges which were 

highlighted were knowledge, skill and experience. This being one of the major challenges 

suggested that expats and onsite employees encounter while facing situations which are 

completely unique and that they are unaware of. The skill market also tells us what the 

requirements are needed to counter those. Lack of skills also emerging as one of the top 

causes which hamper the work assigned to them and most of the time causes delays in 

completion of projects. We also discovered local adjustments to situations as one of the 

major cause of challenges. Filling in with apprehension and doubt before moving into a 

different country. The problem however takes multi fold when adjustments are not only 

lifestyle related but also occur during the working style and nature of many expats. While 

working abroad the respondents also claimed to have a significant language barrier. This 

problem occurs despite the fact that English is spoken in many countries, but this majorly 




6343

ISSN: 2347-1697 




occurs due to the difference in dialects and speech. Followed by other causes such as 

money, climate, being socially inactive and homesickness. Looking at the challenges which 

were pointed out, also influence the factors which help organisation select the right 

candidates. The transfer of knowledge and the training is one of the primary reasons which 

was pointed out. Most organisations to expand business in the field of technology, products, 

markets including customer base and services. The research concluded that the 

compensation strategy was primarily home country based and the head quarter based. In our 

opinion this is a very efficient process as the underlying principle is that the employee 

should not be better or worse off. A similar result was shown while understanding the 

performance appraisal where parent company was responsible. In hindsight this strategy can 

be further elaborated as the talent keeps shifting and diversifying. Hence the host country 

should also be made to play a significant role. Culture shocks set in quite easily for 

employees while travelling, however a better way to conclude and stream line the cultural 

difference can be in the organisation frame, family frame, and perception frame. 

Organisational Frame: We understand that the organisation who act and think differently 

across regions have different regards of functioning. This happens right from addressing 

issues to punctuality to greeting. This frame has a twofold feature, here’s where your 

personal life reaches professional life and key decisions are made. 

Family and Lifestyle Frame: The family and social circle play a large role in impacting the 

cultural understanding and learning newer things. Things learnt through a process of 

gamification through social experiences play a role in shaping the future. 

Perception Frame: How we speak, meaning of sentences and the tonality affects what 

perception we give and make of the people, situations around us. Hence these factors also 

play a key role in determining and developing the cultural adaptability, and also reducing 

cultural indifferences. 

Repatriation process is often undermined by the individuals for expats. The challenges 

which expats face while adjusting back to the home / host country are unaware of. Thus 

companies also pay less attention to the process. The research showed that most expats were 

unaware of the process. This brings us to an interesting point where issues on the personal 

front and work front often get neglected. End result is a demotivated employee, which 

becomes a liability. 

VII. RECOMMENDATIONS 

In today’s global economy, a workforce which understands the way of the world proves to 

be a very strong competitive advantage. International assignments come with a very heavy 

cost. On an average expats cost close to 3 times the cost of an employee back home .The 

companies incur heavy cost to keep expats, close to what they pay a CEO. However the 

results most companies receive are not beneficial compared to the amount they all invest in. 

The employees who are sent abroad should understand the cultural differences and nuances 

of a region. The skill gap analysis should be done well in advance and a pipeline of such 




6344

ISSN: 2347-1697 




employees should be developed. This can reduce the load on employees as most employees 

are ready at being expats. 

Thus focus on building cultural literacy should be of paramount focus. 

Development of leaders and generation of knowledge should be also focused at, they should 

go hand in hand. There may be cases that a company is not aware of the knowledge which is 

required. In this case sufficient reasons as to why employees are being sent should be 

explicitly known to companies.The expat process is developed over a great time period. 

Studying the entire time frames over which the expat and repatriation process needs further 

study and lamenting it would not bring anything new to the table. Time complexities can 

help and influence theories. However there are other variables such as culture, HR functions 

also in play which act as new information. Many organisations should spend research on the 

primary reasons of challenges and failures which are mentioned above in the research. 

The lack of clarity in repatriation process should also be studied and evaluated. The models 

used by companies should be robust in handling different situations and get suitable results 

in getting the best talent back home and empowering them. 

VIII. REFERENCES 

[1] Altman, Y., & Baruch, Y. (2012). Global self-initiated corporate expatriate careers: a new era 

in international assignments? Personnel Review, 41(2), 233-255. 

[2] Awais Bhatti, M., Mohamed Battour, M., Rageh Ismail, A., & Pandiyan Sundram, V. (2014). 

Effects of personality traits (big five) on expatriates adjustment and job performance. Equality, 

Diversity and Inclusion: An International Journal, 33(1), 73-96. 

[3] Baddar Al-Husan, F. Z., Brennan, R., & James, P. (2009). Transferring Western HRM 

practices to developing countries: The case of a privatized utility in Jordan. Personnel 

Review, 38(2), 104-123. 

[4] Baruch, Y., Steele, D. J., & Quantrill, G. A. (2002). Management of expatriation and 

repatriation for novice global player. International Journal of Manpower, 23(7), 659-671. 

[5] Berrell, M., Wright, P., & Thi Van Hoa, T. (1999). The influence of culture on managerial 

behaviour. Journal of management development, 18(7), 578-589. 

[6] Bonache, J. (2005). Job satisfaction among expatriates, repatriates and domestic employees: 

The perceived impact of international assignments on work-related variables. Personnel 

review, 34(1), 110-124. 

[7] Bossard, A. B., & Peterson, R. B. (2005). The repatriate experience as seen by American 

expatriates. Journal of World Business, 40(1), 9-28. 

[8] Brown, C. A., & Busman, M. (2003). Expatriate health-care workers and maintenance of 

standards of practice factors affecting service delivery in Saudi Arabia. International Journal 

of health care Quality assurance, 16(7), 347-353. 

[9] Cai, D. A., & Rodríguez, J. I. (1997). Adjusting to cultural differences: The intercultural 

adaptation model. 

[10] Connelly, B., Hitt, M. A., DeNisi, A. S., & Duane Ireland, R. (2007). Expatriates and 

corporate-level international strategy: governing with the knowledge contract. Management 

Decision, 45(3), 564-581. 

[11] Dawes Farquhar, J. (2009). International explorer expatriate survey. International Journal of 

Bank Marketing, 27(3), 242-246. 

[12] Fechter, A. M. (2008). From “incorporated wives” to “expat girls.”. Gender and family among 

transnational professionals, 193-209. 




6345

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[13] Gibbons, R., & Waldman, M. (2004). Task-specific human capital. The American Economic 

Review, 94(2), 203-207. 

[14] Grin, F., & Sfreddo, C. (1998). Language-based earnings differentials on the Swiss labour 

market: is Italian a liability? International Journal of Manpower, 19(7), 520-532. 

[15] Gupta, A. (2013). Human Resource Selection & Development: Challenges for 

MNC’s. Issues, 1(4). 

[16] Guthrie, J. P., Ash, R. A., & Stevens, C. D. (2003). Are women “better” than men? Personality 

differences and expatriate selection. Journal of Managerial Psychology, 18(3), 229-243. 

[17] Harzing, A. W., & Christensen, C. (2004). Expatriate failure: time to abandon the 

concept? Career Development International, 9(7), 616-626. 

[18] Hurn, B. J. (1999). Repatriation-the toughest assignment of all. Industrial and Commercial 

Training, 31(6), 224-228. 

[19] Hutchings, K. (2002). Improving selection processes but providing marginal support: A 

review of cross-cultural difficulties for expatriates in Australian organisations in China. Cross 

Cultural Management: An International Journal, 9(3), 32-57. 

[20] J. Hurn, B. (2014). The challenges facing international HRM in an increasingly globalised 

environment. Industrial and commercial training, 46(7), 371-378. 

[21] Jassawalla, A. R., Asgary, N., & Sashittal, H. C. (2006). Managing expatriate: The role of 

mentors. International Journal of Commerce and Management, 16(2), 130-140. 

[22] Jordan, J., & Cartwright, S. (1998). Selecting expatriate managers: Key traits and 

competencies. Leadership & Organization Development Journal, 19(2), 89-96. 

[23] Kaye, M., & Taylor, W. G. (1997). Expatriate culture shock in China: A study in the Beijing 

hotel industry. Journal of Managerial Psychology, 12(8), 496-510. 

[24] Lam, H., & Selmer, J. (2004). Are former “third-culture kids” the ideal business 

expatriates? Career Development International, 9(2), 109-122. 

[25] Lazarova, M., & Caligiuri, P. (2002). Retaining repatriates: The role of organizational support 

practices. Journal of world business, 36(4), 389-401. 

[26] Lazarova, M., & Tarique, I. (2005). Knowledge transfer upon repatriation. Journal of World 

Business, 40(4), 361-373. 

[27] Linares, J. (2015). Identifying the Barriers and Challenges to the Effectiveness of Global 

Talent Management (Doctoral dissertation, The Pennsylvania State University). 

[28] Mathur-Helm, B. (2002). Expatriate women managers: at the crossroads of success, challenges 

and career goals. Women in Management Review, 17(1), 18-28. 

[29] McGinley, J. (2008). Expatriate adjustment within a social context: Examination of a sample 

in Russia. Journal of Social, Evolutionary, and cultural psychology, 2(2), 56. 

[30] Michailova, S., & Jormanainen, I. (2011). Knowledge transfer between Russian and Western 

firms: whose absorptive capacity is in question? Critical perspectives on international 

business, 7(3), 250-270. 

[31] Mujtaba, B. G., Fisher, H., Friis, A. S., Johnson, N., Kirkwood, L., & Flores, G. (2011). 

Expatriate performance appraisal management: The use of a 360-degree feedback at Nokia 

Telecommunications. Journal of Business Case Studies (JBCS), 5(1), 45-56. 

[32] Naithani, P., & Jha, A. N. (2009). Challenges Faced by Expatriate Workers in the Gulf 

Cooperation Council Countries. Naithani, P. and Jha, AN (2010). Challenges faced by 

expatriate workers in the GCC countries. International Journal of Business and 

Management, 5(1), 98-104. 

[33] Naithani, P. (2015). A case study of career related challenges of expatriateIndian professionals 

in the GCC countries. Naithani, P. (2013). A case study of career related challenges of 

expatriate Indian professionals in the GCC countries. Int. Journal of Arts and 

Commerce, 2(1), 219-224. 




6346

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[34] Näsholm, M. (2011). Global careerists’ identity construction: A narrative study of repeat 

expatriates and international itinerants.Paik, Y., Segaud, B., & Malinowski, C. (2002). How to 

improve repatriation management: Are motivations and expectations congruent between the 

company and expatriates? International Journal of Manpower, 23(7), 635-648. 

[35] Neault, R. A. (2003). Managing Global Careers: Changes and Challenges for the 21st Century. 

[36] Nikolaeva, T. G. (2010). The challenges of expatriation & repatriation. Department of 

Management, Aarhus University. 

[37] Quang, T., Swierczek, F. W., & Thi Kim Chi, D. (1998). Effective leadership in joint ventures 

in Vietnam: a cross-cultural perspective. Journal of Organizational Change 

Management, 11(4), 357-372. 

[38] Richardson, J. (2006). Self-directed expatriation: family matters. Personnel Review, 35(4), 

469-486. 

[39] Richardson, J., & McKenna, S. (2006). Exploring relationships with home and host countries: 

A study of self-directed expatriates. Cross Cultural Management: An International 

Journal, 13(1), 6-22. 

[40] Schoepp, K., & Forstenlechner, I. (2010). The role of family considerations in an expatriate 

majority environment. Team Performance Management: An International Journal, 16(5/6), 

309-323. 

[41] Selmer, J. (1999). Career issues and international adjustment of business expatriates. Career 

Development International, 4(2), 77-87. 

[42] Selmer, J. (2002). Practice makes perfect? International experience and expatriate 

adjustment. MIR: Management International Review, 71-87. 


Chaudhary,P. , Singh,H. , Pandey, S. (2017) :: “Review of Challenges Faced by 

Global Expatriates and Onsite Project Employees in their Host Countries and at 

Time of Repatriation” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research 

(ISSN: 2347-1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6334-6347, Paper ID: 

IJIFR/V4/E5/056 




6347

www.ijifr.com 



System of Tracking Public Issues 


Key Words 

Wireless Sensor Networks (WSNs), Location Privacy, Privacy, Security 

Computer 

Engineering 

1st Kavita Pokharkar 

2 nd Archana Tajane 

3 rd Priyanka Kale 

4 th Priyanka Gaikwad 

5 th Prof. P. R. Dholi 

Student 




Professor 




Abstract 

Today we face lots of issues in day-to-day life. But there is manual process 

for resolving different kinds of issues. Firstly we have to register a 

complaint at the local government office via manual form filling. Then that 

filled form is processed by the government and it takes lots of efforts, time 

and there is no instant assistance. Here we use GPS and GPRS for 

implementing various location based services. This application will be 

useful for tracking the issue of different department like road issue, 

electrical issue, water issue and other public issue.Location tracking 

systems including the GPS, Active Badge, Bat, Smart Floor and Cricket 

systems attracted a significant group of researchers during the recent 

decades. Android environments provide several benefits to all the Common 

peoples of the society as android phones are the new trend of Society. 

Because of its open- source nature a large number of utilities has been 

developed and android operating system is getting used in many phones. 

Because of its small-size, it can be stolen very easily and the confidentialinformation 

of any organization or personal details stored in the phone 

memory can be easily exposed. 

. 



6348

ISSN: 2347-1697 





Now a day government uses and implements the different technology for the different 

schemes. Every person is busy in his/her daily schedule. Peoples are facing to many 

problems but no one taking the initiatives to take some action or follow some steps. There is 

a lengthy process of solving problems related to government. But here we are developing an 

application which will save the time and will develop the specific area by solving the 

problems or issues of the common people. But there should be a privacy and security. On 

single click the registration form open and you can able to write your issues with the proper 

details of location through the GPS based smart mobile app. For developing such 

application we need the study of the different algorithms and WNS, Android platform and 

so on. A wireless sensor network (WSN) consists of spatially distributed autonomous 

sensors to monitor physical or environmental conditions, such as temperature, sound, 

vibration, pressure, motion, or pollutants. The monitoring purpose of WSNs naturally leaves 

them operating in unattended or sometimes even hostile environments. As such, they are 

exposed to a variety of attacks such as communication eavesdropping, node compromising, 

and signal jamming. The privacy issue is critical for monitoring applications in WSNs. 

Privacy in WSNs can be classified into data privacy and context privacy. Data privacy 

concerns the privacy of data collected as well as queries posted in a WSN. Context privacy 

deals with sensor locations including the source and the destination. Among them, source– 

location privacy concerns the privacy of the locations from which the sensing data is 

generated and collected; destination location privacy is about the location where the 

collected data is delivered. Even though traditional security mechanisms such as encryption 

and authentication can protect data privacy in WSNs, sensor locations are hard to hide. 


1. J. Yan et. al. investigates case studies where text messaging has been exploited to 

deliver safety information and early warnings to users based on the availability of their 

location information. But these are to complex LBS structure. 

2. Peter Ruppel et. al. conclude that reducing the GPS usage can be reached through 

detecting the moments that Cell-ID is providing sufficient accuracy for the envisaged 

application. But they use GSM system which is too costly. 

3. Can Komar et. al. proposed a pure software based solution, namely WLAN Tracker, 

which is based on the signal strength measurements from different wireless access points 

(WAPs). Unlike similar systems, WLAN Tracker is designed to operate in multi-storey 

buildings. Moreover, as a demonstrative example, a simple location based service (LBS) 

is added to WLAN Tracker in order to provide text-based services to its clients. They 

investigate the performance of our system by comparing its location estimations with 

real values. 

4. Lin Yao et. al. proposed a scheme to protect the source–location privacy based on a 

novel use of multiring topology. To achieve a uniformly distributed traffic pattern 

throughout the network, the source node selects two random rings each from its external 

Kavita Pokharkar, Archana Tajane, Priyanka Kale, Priyanka 

Gaikwad, Prof. P. R. Dholi:: System of Tracking Public Issues 

6349

ISSN: 2347-1697 




rings and internal rings and a set of two random angles with a sum of 180 degrees for 

each packet. The packet is sent at one of the angles in each ring. Fake packets are also 

injected to provide path diversity and to increase attack time, which is defined as the 

time that the adversary takes to locate the source successfully. These techniques protect 

the source node from packet tracing attacks as well as traffic analysis attacks. 

5. Charles Steinfield provides a realistic assessment of the potential for location based 

services, examining the market opportunity, technological origins, likely services, 

emerging policy issues, and potential future directions. 

6. Kamat et. al. designed some sort of routing process called Phantom routing to protect the 

location privacy connected with source nodes. With Phantom routing, packets randomly 

walk into a virtual source before the normal delivery. However, Phantom routing cannot 

protect your receiver’s position privacy properly. Additionally, randomly walk prolongs 

your delivery latency. 

7. Deng et. al. proposed Differential Forced Fractal Propagation (DEFP) versus traffic 

evaluation attack for the location privacy of BS. Multi-path direction-finding and bogus 

message propagation are released into DEFP. But this specific work concentrates on the 

traffic-analysis strike, which is not a more suitable measure to have an adversary. 

8. Jian et. al. designed the location privacy direction-finding protocol (LPR) to protect the 

receiver’s location]. LPR combines both randomly walk as well as fake packet injection. 

On the other hand, random stroll brings more packet hold up, and bogus packet injection 

in LPR is completely random, with no consideration connected with optimization 

matter. 

9. Nezhad et. al. considered your privacy problem throughout the topology discovery 

period as well as proposed an distributed strategy for network topology discovery to 

protect the destroy location solitude. However, this process has a higher complexity as 

well as brings more loads in order to sensor communities. 

III. PROPOSED SYSTEM 

In the proposed system we are developing an application of real time issue tracking services 

through Google Web Services and Android API's. We can use GPS and GPRS for 

implementing various location based services. Since this application include various 

packages in one it is user friendly. This application will be useful for tracking the issue of 

different department like road issue, electrical issue, water issue and other public issue. 

Following modules are used 

1. Upload Issue Image 7. Login 

2. Check issues list 8. View Issue 

3. Add comment. 9. Issue details 

4. Like the issue 10. Google Maps 

5. Raise with local newspaper 11. Check and add comments. 

6. Web Application 12. Send Notice 



6350

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Figure 1: Conceptual view of Proposed System 

IV. WLAN TRACKER 

WLAN Tracker system consists of server and client components. The client communicates 

with the server and sends the necessary data to it where the server performs the location 

tracking operation. WLAN Tracker operates in two phases, the data collection phase and the 

execution phase. In the data collection phase, the signal map that will be used in the 

execution phase is constructed. During this phase, the user walks around the map area and 

takes samples with the help of the GUI. These data are stored in a database. In the execution 

phase, the client periodically sends the signal levels detected to the server for location 

estimation. 

V. LOCATION ESTIMATION PROCESS 

During the location estimation process, each map thread works independently without 

communicating with other map threads. Thus, a map may be added or removed without 

affecting the system. For example, some maps in the system may have common areas and a 

client within this area is displayed on both maps. In the location estimation, first of all, the 

map thread tries to determine if the received packet belongs to its responsible map area or 

not. If there is a common WAP between its signal map data and the received signal data, 

then it is concluded that the client is in its map area. This initial filtering is applied to 

decrease the size of the search set that will be used in the further steps of the estimation. The 

distance between each data set can be computed according to different metrics, Euclidian 

distance or Manhattan distance. 

 

VI. TECHNIQUES 

Probabilistic flooding is an optimization of the baseline flooding technique to reduce 

energy consumption. In probabilistic flooding, a subset of nodes is chosen randomly, 

and only the subset forwards data. Each node forwards or broadcasts a packet with a 

predetermined probability after it receives packets. It is obvious that this scheme can not 



6351

ISSN: 2347-1697 




 

only significantly reduce energy consumption but also effectively prevent the adversary 

from tracing back to the data source. Nonetheless, the reception of data by the base 

station is not guaranteed owing to the randomness involved in this approach. 

Phantom flooding attempts to direct messages to different locations of the network so 

that the adversary cannot observe a steady stream of messages for its tracing purpose, 

which shares the same insights as probabilistic flooding. However, probabilistic flooding 

is not very effective to achieve this goal because shorter paths are more likely to deliver 

more messages. Therefore, a phantom source is used to draw the attacker away from the 

real source. In phantom flooding, when the real source needs to send out a message, it 

uncast the message to a random node, which will send it out using baseline flooding. 

VII. CONCLUSION 

In this paper we proposed a system which tracks the common people issues or problems. 

Any person can easily handle it because app or site is too much user-friendly. It will save 

the time and will develop the specific area by solving the problems or issues of the common 

people. We are also providing the privacy and security. So the common person will be 

secure and they send the complaints without any fare. 

VIII. REFERENCES 

[1] Can Komar and Cem Ersoy, “Location Tracking and Location Based Service Using IEEE 

802.11 WLAN Infrastructure”, by the State Planning Organization of Turkey. 

[2] Lin Yao, Lin Kang, Fangyu Deng, Jing Deng, “Protecting source–location privacy based on 

multirings in wireless sensor networks”, Published online in Wiley Online Library, 2013 

[3] I.F. Akyildiz, W. Su, Y. Sankara subramaniam, and E. Cayirci, ―Wireless Sensor Networks: 

A Survey,‖ Computer Networks, vol. 38, no. 4, pp. 393-422, 2002. 

[4] B. Bamba, L. Liu, P. Pesti, and T. Wang, ―Supporting Anonymous Location Queries in 

Mobile Environments with Privacy grid,, Proc. Int’l Conf. World Wide Web (WWW ’08), 

2008. 

[5] B. Bollobas, D. Gamarnik, O. Riordan, and B. Sudakov, ―On the Value of a Random 

Minimum Weight Steiner Tree, Combinatorica, vol. 24, no. 2, pp. 187-207, 2004. 

[6] H. Chan, A. Perrig, and D. Song, ―Random Key Predistribution Schemes for Sensor 

Networks, Proc. IEEE Symp. Security and Privacy (S&P’03), pp. 197-213, May 2003. 

[7] J. Deng, R. Han, and S. Mishra, ―Enhancing Base Station Security in Wireless Sensor 

Networks, Technical Report CU-CS-951-03, Univ. of Colorado, Dept. of Computer Science, 

2003. 

[8] Yick J, Mukherjee B, Ghosal D. Wireless sensor network survey. Computer Networks, 2008. 

[9] Wang Y, Attebury G, Ramamurthy B. A survey of security issues in wireless sensor 

networks. IEEE Communications Surveys and Tutorials 2006; 8(2):2–23. 

[10] Chen X, Makki K, Yen K, Pissinou N. Sensor network security: a survey. IEEE 

Communications Surveys Tutorials 2009; 11(2):52–73. 

[11] Li N, Zhang N, Das S, Thuraisingham B. Privacy preservation in wireless sensor networks: a 

state-of-the-art survey. Ad Hoc Networks 2009; 7(8):1501–1514. 

[12] Kamat P, Zhang Y, Trappe W, Ozturk C. Enhancing source-location privacy in sensor 

network routing. Proceedings of the 25th Distributed Computing Systems (ICDCS’05), 

Columbus, OH, USA, 2005 



6352

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[13] Jian Y, Chen S, Zhang Z, Zhang L. A novel scheme for protecting receiver’s location privacy 

in wireless sensor networks. IEEE Transactions on Wireless Communications 2008; 

7(10):3769–3779. 


Pokharkar,K. , Tajane,A. , Kale,P. , Gaikwad,p. , Dholi, P. R. (2017) :: “System of 

Tracking Public Issues” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research 

(ISSN: 2347-1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, pp. 6348-6353, Paper ID: 

IJIFR/V4/E5/042 



6353

www.ijifr.com 



A study on Library Resources and 

Services provided by the Degree Colleges 

of Hyderabad Karnataka Region 

Library 

Paper ID IJIFR/V4/ E5/ 046 Page No. 6354-6360 Research Area 

Services 

Degree College Libraries, Information Service Providers, Internet Facility, E- 

Key Words 

Journals Databases, 

Dr. G. S. Biradar 

Assistant Librarian 

Gulbarga University, 

P.G.Centre, Raichur- Karnataka 

Abstract 

Academic libraries are part of the large academic bodies. Generation, 

organization and dissemination of information and knowledge are subject 

to constant change since 1980s. Most academic libraries have the facility of 

Internet resources which supplement the print collection of the library. 

These changes are substantial. The problem with us is that many changes 

we come across, we immediately take it as a part of routine. Internet facility 

helps in saving time, repetition and redundancy, time lag and delays. We 

can communicate with information service providers within no time in case 

of any problem, change or adding new things to existing collection or 

services. 


In an ideal educational system, an academic library is the centre of academic life. A library 

is the strength of any educational institution and without proper libraries there can be no real 

progress in education. A library is the fountainhead from which flows he water of 

knowledge. Education comprises of two essential elements, namely teachers and books. An 

ideal library provides valuable support to education. At the same time a sound educational 

system is dependent on good libraries. Any form of educational work without libraries 

becomes meaningless. In the present study we analyse the library staff, books and journals 

collection, subscription of E-journals databases, library users, and seating capacity in 

libraries, number of books borrowed per day etc in degree colleges. 

1.1 Scope and limitations: This study is confined to information resources and services 

provided by the libraries of Degree Colleges of Hyderabad Karnataka Region that aim to 

. 



6354

ISSN: 2347-1697 




fulfil the needs of the faculty and students. It covers Number of Library Staff, Books and 

Journals Collection, Subscription of E-journals Databases, Library Users and Seating 

Capacity in Libraries, Number of Books Borrowed per day etc. 

II. OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY 

The main objective of the study is to find the effectiveness of library services to the students 

and staff of Hyderabad Karnataka Region. 

i.) To identify the various types of resources available in degree college libraries of 

Hyderabad Karnataka Region. 

ii.) To know the provision and extent of use of electronic resources in degree college 

libraries of Hyderabad Karnataka Region. 

iii.) To find out extent of computerization of library and extent of its use by student and 

staff. 

III. HYPOTHESES 

1. The facilities and equipments held in Degree college libraries are adequate. 

2. The utility and provision of electronic resources in Degree college libraries are 

satisfactory. 

3. The initiation of computerization of library and extent of its use by students and staff in 

Degree college libraries is limited. 

IV. DESIGN OF THE STUDY 

1.1. Sample: In this study Libraries of 50 Degree Colleges from which come under 

Hyderabad Karnataka Region, 

1.2. Data collection Tools: The investigator adopted survey method to collect data from 

librarians from 50 Degree Colleges by using a structured questionnaire. The 

questionnaire for the librarians was first designed and the same were distributed to the 

librarians of degree colleges. A questionnaire consisting of 19 questions was designed 

to elicit the opinion of the faculty. These were distributed among the faculty and the 

required data was collected which was further supplemented by informal discussions 

with the faculty. The analysis and interpretation of the data is presented in the 

subsequent sections. 

1.3. Data Collection: After receiving the questionnaires from various Degree college 

libraries which come under Hyderabad Karnataka Region, they were analyzed in the 

light of the objectives stated. After data collection the data entries were done in excel 

and were transferred to SPSS statistical software to derive necessary values. To test the 

research hypothesis, Chi-Square and Spearman correlation test were used. 

1.4. Data Analysis: The data collected were consolidated using MS-Excel, a spreadsheet 

package. The data were then subjected further statistical treatment by using SPSS 

package, version 21 following statistical techniques were employed in the present study 

a. Descriptive Statistics; b. Chi-square Test/Contingency Table Analysis 

Dr. G. S. Biradar :: A study on Library Resources and Services 

provided by the Degree Colleges of Hyderabad Karnataka Region 

6355

ISSN: 2347-1697 




V. ANALYSIS OF THE DATA 

4.1. Number of Library Staff: 

Table-1: Number of Library Staff in degree colleges libraries 

Sl. No. 

No. of Library 

Staff 

Number of Libraries 

Professional Staff 

Non- professional 

Staff 

1 0-1 40 26.7% 95 63.3% 

2 2-3 60 40.0% 40 26.7% 

3 4-5 32 21.3% 10 6.7% 

4 5+ 18 12.0% 5 3.3% 

Total 150 100.0% 150 100.0% 

X 2 24.61 136.66 

P Value 0.000 0.000 

The table - 1 exhibit the data about professional and non-professional library staff working 

in different degree college. The data about professional staff shows that there are 40 (26.7%) 

degree college libraries which have employed 0-1 professional library staff, followed by 60 

(40.0%) libraries have employed 2-3 professional library staff, 10 (6.7%%) libraries have 

employed 4-5 professional library staff and remaining 5 (3.3%) degree college libraries have 

employed above 5 professional library staff. Further chi-square test revealed a significant 

difference (Chi-square=24.61; P=0.000) revealing that majority of the degree colleges had 

minimum professional library staff with 0-2 and 2-3 staff strength. 

The data about non-professional library staff working in degree colleges libraries shows 

that 95 (63.3%%) degree colleges libraries employ below 2 non-professional library staff, 

40 (26.7%) libraries employ 2-3 non-professional library staff, 12 (14.6%) libraries employ 

5-6 non-professional library staff and only 9 (11%) degree colleges libraries employ above 

6 non-professional library staff. Further chi-square test revealed a significant difference 

(Chi-square=136.66; P=.000) revealing that majority of the degree colleges had minimum 

professional library staff with 0-1 and 2-3 staff strength. 

4.2. Books and Journals Collection: 

Table –2: Books and Journals collection in Degree college Libraries 

Sl. No Collection of Bound Volumes No. of degree colleges Percentage 

1 Below 400 10 6.7% 

2 401-550 40 26.7% 

3 551-600 31 20.7% 

4 601-1000 26 17.3% 

5 1001-2000 23 15.3% 

6 Above 2001 20 13.3% 

Total 150 100.0% 

X 2 20.64 

P Value 0.001 



6356

ISSN: 2347-1697 




The table-2 shows bound volumes of journals in different degree colleges under study. The 

data about collection of bound volumes reveal that there are 10 (6.7%) degree college 

libraries which have below 400 bound volumes, followed by 40 (26.7%) each libraries have 

above 401-550 bound volumes, 31 (20.7%) libraries have 551-600 bound volumes of 

journals, 26 (17.3%) libraries have 601-1000 bound volumes of journals, 23 (15.3%) 

libraries have 1001-2000 bound volumes of journals and remaining only 20 (13.3%) degree 

college libraries have below 2001 bound volumes. Chi-Square test revealed a significant 

difference between groups of frequencies of books in various capacity (X2=20.64; P=.843) 

revealing that majority of the degree colleges had minimum bound journals with 501- 1000 

bound journals collection. 

4.3. Subscription of E-journals Databases: 

Table – 3: Subscription of E-journals Databases in degree college libraries 

Sl. E-Journals No. of degree 

No. Databases colleges 

Percentage X 2 P Value 

1 1-2 30 20.0% 

2 3-5 44 29.3% 

3 5-7 60 40.0% 28.45 0.000 

4 7+ 16 10.7% 

Total 150 100.0% 

The table-3 provides data about e-journals database subscription in research center libraries 

under study. There are 30 (20.0%) degree college libraries which subscribe 1-2 e-journals 

databases, followed by 44 (29.3%) libraries subscribe 3-5 e-journals databases, 60 (40.0%) 

libraries subscribe 5-7 e-journals databases and only 16 (10.7%) degree college libraries 

subscribe above 7+ e-journals database. Chi-Square test revealed a significant difference 

between groups of frequencies of e-journals package capacity (X2 =28.45; P=0.000) 

revealing that majority of the degree college had minimum with 5-7 and 3-5 subscribe E- 

journal package. 

4.4. Library Users 

Table – 4: Library Users in Degree College Libraries 

Sl. 

No. of 

No. of 

Students 

Percentage Staff 

No 

Libraries 

Libraries 

Percentage 

1 Below 500 12 8.0 Below 50 14 9.3 

2 501-1000 65 43.3 51-100 50 33.3 

3 1001-1500 32 21.3 101-200 40 26.7 

4 1501-2000 22 14.7 200-300 20 13.3 

5 2001-2500 10 6.7 300+ 26 17.3 

6 2500+ 9 6.0 Total 150 100.0 

Total 150 100.0 

X 2 92.32 29.06 

P Value .000 0.000 



6357

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Table - 4 depicts the number of users in 150 degree college libraries who come under the 

category of students and staff. The data about student users in libraries of degree college 

shows that there are Below 500 students in 12 (8.0%) degree college libraries, followed by 

501-1000 students in 65 (43.3%) libraries, 1001-1500 students in 32 (21.3%) libraries, 

1501-2000 students in 22 (14.7%) libraries, 2001-2500 students in 10 (6.7%) libraries and 

only more than 2500+ students in 9 (6.0%) degree college libraries. Chi-Square test revealed 

a significant difference between groups of frequencies of student using in various capacity 

(X 2 =92.32; P=0.000) revealing that majority of the degree colleges had minimum with 501- 

1000 and 1001-1500 student users in their libraries. 

The data about number of staff users in degree college libraries shows that there are Below 

500 staff users in 14 (9.3%) libraries, followed by 51-100 staff in 50 (33.3%) libraries, 101- 

200 staff in 40 (26.7%) libraries and 200-300 staff using their 20 (13.3%) libraries and 300+ 

staff users in 26 (17.3%) libraries. Chi-Square test revealed a significant difference between 

groups of frequencies of staff use their libraries in various capacity (X 2 =29.06; P=0.000) 

revealing that majority of the degree colleges had minimum with Below 50 and 300+ staff 

use their libraries. 

4.5. Seating Capacity: 

Table – 5: Seating Capacity in Degree college Libraries 

Sl. No. Seating capacity Frequency Percentage X 2 P 

Value 

1 51-100 43 28.7 

2 101-150 40 26.7 

3 151-200 25 16.7 

18.80 0.001 

4 Below 250 30 20.0 

5 Above 250 12 8.0 

6 Total 150 100.0 

The data relating to the seating capacity of the degree colleges libraries shows that there are 

51-100 seating capacity in 43(28.7%) degree colleges libraries, followed by 101-150 seating 

capacity in 40 (26.7%) libraries, 151-200 seating capacity in 25(16.7%) libraries, below 250 

seating capacity in 30 (20.0%) libraries, above 250 seating capacity in 12 (8.0%) libraries. 

Chi-Square test revealed a significant difference between groups of frequencies of seating 

capacities (X 2 =18.80; P=0.001) revealing that majority of the degree colleges had minimum 

with 151-200 and Above 250 seating capacity. 

4.6. Number of Books Borrowed Per Day: 

Table –6: Number of Books Borrowed per day in Degree College Libraries 

Sl. No. 

Number of Books 

Borrowed Per Day 

1 101-200 34 22.7 

Frequency Percentage X 2 P- 

Value 

2 201-300 52 34.7 

3 301-400 25 16.7 

4 Below 100 15 10.0 

49.92 0.000 



6358

ISSN: 2347-1697 




5 Above 500 12 8.0 

6 401-500 12 8.0 

Total 150 100.0 

Table 6 and figure 6 depicts the data about the number of books borrowed per day by the 

users in degree college libraries by the users. The number of books borrowed per day are 

101-200 in 34(22.7%) degree colleges libraries, followed by 201-300 books borrowed in 52 

(34.7%) libraries, 301-400 books borrowed in 25 (16.7%) libraries, below 100 books are 

borrowed in 15 (10.0%) libraries, above 500 books are borrowed in 12 (8.0%) libraries and 

401-500 books borrowed in 12(8.0%) degree colleges libraries. Chi-Square test revealed a 

significant difference between groups of frequencies of books borrowed per day from the 

library in various capacity (X 2 =49.92; P=0.000) revealing that majority of the degree 

colleges had minimum with 401-500 and Above 500 books per day from the library. 

VI. FINDINGS & CONCLUSION 

Majority of respondents expressed their opinion that they visit the library for the purpose of 

consulting text-books, reference books, to acquire current and general information and to 

read newspapers and popular magazines, etc. The data about professional staff shows that 

there are 40 (26.7%) degree college libraries which have employed 0-1 professional library 

staff, followed by 60 (40.0%) libraries have employed 2-3 professional library staff, 10 

(6.7%%) libraries have employed 4-5 professional library staff and remaining 5 (3.3%) 

degree college libraries have employed above 5 professional library staff. The data about 

non-professional library staff working in degree colleges libraries shows that 95 (63.3%%) 

degree colleges libraries employ below 2 non-professional library staff, 40 (26.7%) libraries 

employ 2-3 non-professional library staff, 12 (14.6%) libraries employ 5-6 non-professional 

library staff and only 9 (11%) degree colleges libraries employ above 6 non-professional 

library staff. The data about collection of bound volumes reveal that there are 10 (6.7%) 

degree college libraries which have below 400 bound volumes, followed by 40 (26.7%) 

each libraries have above 401-550 bound volumes, 31 (20.7%) libraries have 551-600 bound 

volumes of journals, 26 (17.3%) libraries have 601-1000 bound volumes of journals, 23 

(15.3%) libraries have 1001-2000 bound volumes of journals and remaining only 20 

(13.3%) degree college libraries have below 2001 bound volumes. There are 30 (20.0%) 

degree college libraries which subscribe 1-2 e-journals databases, followed by 44 (29.3%) 

libraries subscribe 3-5 e-journals databases, 60 (40.0%) libraries subscribe 5-7 e-journals 

databases and only 16 (10.7%) degree college libraries subscribe above 7+ e-journals 

database. The data about student users in libraries of degree college shows that there are 

Below 500 students in 12 (8.0%) degree college libraries, followed by 501-1000 students in 

65 (43.3%) libraries, 1001-1500 students in 32 (21.3%) libraries, 1501-2000 students in 22 

(14.7%) libraries, 2001-2500 students in 10 (6.7%) libraries and only more than 2500+ 

students in 9 (6.0%) degree college libraries. The data about number of staff users in degree 

college libraries shows that there are Below 500 staff users in 14 (9.3%) libraries, followed 



6359

ISSN: 2347-1697 




by 51-100 staff in 50 (33.3%) libraries, 101-200 staff in 40 (26.7%) libraries and 200-300 

staff using their 20 (13.3%) libraries and 300+ staff users in 26 (17.3%) libraries. 


1. Biradar,B.S., & Kumar,S.B.T (2000). Evaluation of information services and facilities offered by 

D.V.S. Polytechnic college library: A case study. Library Herald, 38 (2), 112-130. 

2. Chanderkant, L. S. (1971). Polytechnical education in India.. Bombay: MacMillan 

3. Clougherty, L. (2002). Faculty and staff use of academic library resources and services: a 

University of Iowa Libraries' perspective. Portal: Libraries and the Academy, 2(4), 627-646. 

4. Dougherty, R. M. (1991). Needed: user-responsive research libraries. Library Journal, 59-62. 


Biradar,G.S. (2017) :: “A study on Library Resources and Services provided by the 

Degree Colleges of Hyderabad Karnataka Region” International Journal of 

Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347-1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, 

pp. 6354-6360, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/046 



6360

www.ijifr.com 



The Impact of Patanjali Products on the 

FMCG Business Hither to Dominated by 

Multi-Nationals like Hul, P&G, Nestle etc. 

Management 


Studies 

Fast Moving Consumer Goods, Non-Probability Convenience Sampling 

Procedure, Advertisements, Quality, Baba Ramdev's Spirituality, Indigenous 

Key Words 

Manufacturing, Ayurvedic Experience Patanjali Products, Kaiser-Meyer- 

Olkin Measure, Bartlett's Test of Sphericity 

1 st Dr. Anuja Agarwal 

2 nd Sakshi Gupta MBA Tech. Student 

3 rd Srashti Gupta 

4 th Vinayak Nautiyal 

Associate Dean, 







Abstract 

With trade analysts ruling out Patanjali just as a fad, many of the big 

player FMCG companies are discussing the strong Patanjali brand in their 

board rooms. Patanjali is also being called the Indian Body Shop. We try to 

understand the buying behaviour of the consumers of Patanjali and also the 

most beneficial product mix of Patanjali and areas of opportunity for them 

through questionnaire and interviews. It is worth to know whether 

Patanjali can increase their market share, penetration and sales by 

deploying their resources to the popular products and leverage the most 

influential factor of customers buying decision for their growth. Through 

this we would also see whether Patanjali increasing their modes of supply 

chain has solved their problem of shortage of goods. This will help us 

understand the impact of Patanjali products on the FMCG business 

previously dominated by big shot companies like HUL, P&G and Nestle. 


Patanjali has grown from strength to strength and is giving big player FMCG companies a 

run for their money. With recording net sales worth Rs. 2000 crores last year and targeting a 

. 



6361

ISSN: 2347-1697 




net sales worth Rs. 5000 crores this financial year ending in a few days, Patanjali has really 

come a long way. Everything is working right for them. This type of growth is very 

astonishing for an Indian company competing with foreign players like HUL, P&G and 

Nestle. It has already crossed the sales of many established players. Baba Ramdev, price and 

quality are the three most important factors working for them. With trade analysts 

estimating that Patanjali will cross the Rs. 20,000 crores mark by 2020, it is definitely a 

force to reckon with and take notice of before it’s too late. With strategic alliances with 

many e commerce business and supermarkets like Big Bazaar and Reliance Fresh Direct, it 

has increased its value chain. Patanjali has realized that to succeed they have to enhance 

their distribution from the tradition Patanjali Arogya Kendra or Chikitsalyas. Patanjali has a 

diverse product portfolio from having nutrition and supplements to grocery, from home care 

to personal care and health care. It has just entered into the health juice products trying to 

compete with Real and Tropicana. Cow ghee is its most famous product. With expansion 

plans in Maharashtra, Patanjali wants to step up its production so that it can meet the 

growing demand of products and avoid shortage. It is also thinking of setting up a food plant 

somewhere in south of India. With low advertising spends, Patanjali has still been able to 

carve a name for itself. But in recent months it has amplified its advertisements. The price of 

Patanjali products are around 20% lower than that of their competitors and it is a huge 

reason why it is gaining popularity besides eating into the market share. On the quality front 

also it is excellent as it leverages its image of being ayurvedic and swadeshi factor. The 

recommendations of Patanjali are working very good for the brand itself as people are 

recommending it to their friends and family members. It seems that there is more 

acceptability of the brand amongst older people than younger people but it won’t take time 

for that to change. With demand so great that people at Marine Lines pull up the shutter 

after 7 pm to get the products even after the shop is closed for the day for counting cash, it 

can be seen that it has carved a place for itself amongst the consumers. It is the next Indian 

Body Shop. 

1.1 Background of Study 

The traditional uses of herbal products have a substantial historical and cultural importance. 

Although modern chemical based products exist side by side and have also gained 

popularity with the emerging era. Spiritual organizations are launching and selling their own 

products for the customers to capture the market influencing the consumption behaviour of 

masses, which mainly depend on natural and herbal products. Baba Ramdev’s Patanjali 

Ayurved launched in 2006 is perhaps the fastest growing fast moving consumer goods 

company in India. A business revolution, marketing through spirituality and an ayurvedic 

magic wand for healthy living, it has been called all by researchers in previous background 

studies. 

1.2 Statement of the Problem 

Since Patanjali Ayurved Ltd. is a leading fast moving consumer goods company with a 

tremendous growth in the past few years, it is a growing threat to the other influential 

FMCG’s. Hence to study the growing market of Patanjali our aim is to determine what 

Dr. Anuja Agarwal, Sakshi Gupta, Srashti Gupta, Vinayak 

Nautiyal :: The Impact of Patanjali Products on the FMCG 

Business Hither to Dominated by Multi-Nationals like Hul, P&G, 

Nestle etc. 

6362

ISSN: 2347-1697 




factors are responsible for giving Patanjali a head over others FMCG’s. This study will 

determine the different distribution channels through which Patanjali is pushing its products 

in the market. It focuses on key determinants which gives Patanjali a competitive edge over 

other competitors and also the issues of how the shortage of products is influencing its sales, 

customer satisfaction and its production strategy. 

So the statement of the problem is that which factors are working for Patanjali and the 

perception of these factors towards the consumers along with the most popular product 

portfolio among its various distribution channels. 

1.3 Purpose of the Study 

The purpose of the study is to find out certain factors that have led to the growing boom of 

Patanjali products in the market, how different channels lead to pushing sales of products 

and to determine how shortage of some best-selling products leads to loss of opportunity 

costs and other not popular products have led to increased inventory costs of products 

through different distribution channels. 

Purpose 1: Based on demographic data, is there any specific pattern which can be 

observed? 

H0: There is no relationship between the buying pattern of male and female. 

H1: There is a relationship between the buying pattern of male and female. 

H0: There is no relationship between the buying patterns of on the basis of age groups. 

H1: There is a relationship between the buying patterns on the basis of age groups. 

Purpose 2: What are the important factors that give Patanjali an edge over other FMCGs? 

H0: There is no relationship between the factors that affect the mindset of consumers of 

Patanjali. 

H1: There is a relationship between the factors that affect the mindset of consumers of 

Patanjali. 

Purpose 3: Which are the most popular products of Patanjali? 

This research will help us to understand the market dynamics and the customer behaviour 

regarding Patanjali’s products and why large based customers are switching from multi 

nationals like HUL to Patanjali’s herbal based products and to know whether Patanjali can 

increase its sales by increasing its opportunity cost and reducing its inventory cost by 

manufacturing more popular products. 

II. REVIEW OF RELATED LITERATURE 

Layak and Singh (2015) report “Desi bustle v/s MNC muscle” stating how 

Ramdev’s Patanjali is setting trend for HUL and how Baba Ramdev’s 

unconventional marketing and strong follower base coupled with aggressive pricing 

has helped him overtake established players in ayurvedic FMCG like Emami and 

Himalaya. 

Some facts and figures 

Roy, Lath and Sharma (2015) believe that strong innovation and new products 

pipeline, pricing discounts to the peers, ayurvedic and natural propositions with low 

A&P spends and manufacturing indigenously lend Patanjali’s products a competitive 




Nestle etc. 

6363

ISSN: 2347-1697 




 

 

 

 

advantage but distribution and stock outs remain a key factor. Patanjali Ayurved is 

one of the India’s largest food and herbal parks in the world equipped with an 

excellent R&D facility and world‐class manufacturing machinery. Patanjali has 

completed its revenue target of INR 2000 crores in FY15 and now the management 

has set a revenue target of INR 5000 crores in FY16. The company has low A&P 

spends which leverages Baba Ramdev’s brand pull, leads to provide its customers a 

discount of 15‐30% to competition, while other companies have A&P spends 

ranging from 12‐18%, as a % of sales. Even though the company’s thrust is not on 

profitability, the company managed to regulate 20% EBITDA margin in FY15, 

supported by better cost management which includes latest machinery and strong 

R&D capabilities and lower A&P spends. Patanjali registered revenue CAGR of 

64.7% over FY12‐15. 

Vyas (2015) believes Patanjali instead of outsourcing like established, listed FMCG 

firms, it has flourished on a backward integration model, using large tracts of land to 

cultivate and run its factories. Patanjali's revenues have more than quadrupled in the 

past three years. Despite undercutting competitors, PAL's operating margin is around 

20% — higher than many of its peers which advertise aggressively. 

According to Pittie (2015), Patanjali is not just targeting its own distribution 

Chikitsalayas, but also big retailers like Reliance Retail, Big Bazaar, Hyper City and 

Star Bazaar are stocking Ramdev's FMCG products. But the real play is online. 

While Patanjali's products are already available at e-commerce site BigBasket, 

Ramdev is now aiming for Amazon too.To allow the consumers to locate nearby 

outlets that are selling Patanjali products and also to facilitate online ordering of 

products, Patanjali has launched its mobile app. Patanjali also sells its products 

through the Patanjali Arogya Kendras, Swadeshi Kendras and Patanjali 

Chikitsalayas. The company has 10,000 franchisee model of Chikitshalyas and 

Arogya Kendras and around 2 lakh outlets that are selling Patanjali products. The 

company operates through 100 super distributors. 

Kumar (2014) reports that the Patanjali Mega Food Park (PMFP) has been envisaged 

to help in creation of infrastructure for food processing and a ‘farm-to-plate’ supply 

chain system. It helps in maximum value addition by backward and forward 

integration between the farmers, factory and the market. The supply chain doesn’t 

have any intermediary in between but rather it’s a direct from supplier to producer to 

consumer. This also helps in reducing the cost because it avoids the unnecessary 

commission cost and other related charges of the intermediaries. 

Trend of Patanjali products: Singh and Rajni (2015) reports that PAL perhaps lacks 

most ingredients for building a large-scale consumer goods business, be its 

negligible A&P (advertising & promotion) spends or distribution network. Yet, the 

brand power of a yoga guru has brought PAL into the top league with topline 

reportedly in excess of Jyothy Labs and Emami. 




Nestle etc. 

6364

ISSN: 2347-1697 




 

 

 

 

Rani & Shukla (2012) analysed the trends of Patanjali products that have increased 

from 2008 to 2011.The Patanjali Ayurvedic Kendra in Pantnagar was started with 26 

Patanjali products. These 26 products includes 13 products in medicinal, 9 products 

in food and 4 products in cosmetic category. In 2008 total 63 products were 

available at Patanjali Ayurvedic Kendra out of which 34 were medicinal, 22 were 

food and 7 were cosmetic products followed with an addition of 22 products during 

2009. Till 2012 there were 120 products available among which 44 are medicinal, 34 

are food and 55 are cosmetic which says an increase of total 94 products in just 4 

years. 

Drawbacks of Patanjali’s growth: A number of limitations perceived by customers, 

associated with products acted as barriers in consumer decision making process and 

also affected consumer behaviour. Data showed that the problem of shortage of 

products on retail outlet as the major limitation as reported by the majority of 

respondents (88.88%). Only one retail outlet in Pantnagar market was another 

limitation and reported by 63.33 percent respondents. No home delivery (43.33%) 

and no any other alternative (36.66%) were also an issue till 2012.Consumers of 

Patanjali products also suggested to improve consumer acceptability (51.11%). 

Consumers suggested that Patanjali should provide the detailed information about 

eve-products. 48.88% suggested improving the delivery system. About 44% 

consumers suggested maintaining the regular delivery of products. More 

advertisement (41.11%) and clarity in advertisement (37.77%) regarding the product 

attributes were other suggestions given by the consumers. It was suggested by 30% 

consumers that Patanjali should pack the products especially juice in small amount 

in order to improve consumer acceptability. Easy availability of products at retail 

shops by 28.88% consumers whereas 21.11% consumers suggested reducing the cost 

of some cosmetic products like cream, cleanser, etc. There were 18-19% respondents 

who suggested to increase production of products. 

Khasgiwala and Bapat (2014) believe that despite of the great demand of Patanjali 

products, the company is still inefficient in its production and supply chain 

management. They address the case of retail store owner of Patanjali Ayurveda in 

Indore who himself is a highly satisfied consumer of Patanjali products that are low 

priced with reasonably good quality. And more so the product becomes value rich 

because they carry the name of Baba Ramdev on it but is frustrated with the 

availability of these products for other consumers as well. 

Patanjali’s products have captured a huge lot of consumers within a short span of 

time providing its loyal customers with exclusive quality and reduced price products. 

It has grown during these years with its excellent R&D facility, latest machinery, 

better cost management and high tech infrastructure by constructing India’s largest 

Food and Herbal Park. It has also established its market online giving a stiff 

competition to other FMCG companies. The trend of Patanjali products have 

increased tremendously with few limitations of non-availability of products at retail 




Nestle etc. 

6365

ISSN: 2347-1697 




stores, less number of retail outlets available and its irregular delivery system. 

Despite of its great demand, company is still inefficient in its production and supply 

chain management. The company is working on plugging the gaps in the supply 

chain and distribution and plans to implement ERP for better inventory management 

and consolidate its online presence. The company has worked on its objective of 

empowering farmers economically. In upcoming years, due to its herbal base 

products company might also leverage some tax exclusion under government 

policies leading to increase in its profits and decreased prices of product. The main 

marketing tool of the company is its good image after spirituality and is selling its 

products under the name of Swami Ramdev. Since Patanjali has its production inhouse, 

it gives it a competitive advantage over MNC’s like HUL, P&G, NESTLE 

etc. 

III. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 

3.1 Description of Research Design and Procedures Used 

This is a descriptive and causal research of quantitative nature under which 

questionnaire study will be carried out. Also a descriptive qualitative research under 

which an interview will be carried out is also a part of our design. An ethnographic 

study will also be carried out in supermarkets to observe the nature of the buying 

behaviour of the consumers. 

3.2 Sources of Data 

Participants in this study will include Patanjali consumers (a minimum of 30 

participants of two age groups, i.e., 20-34 and 35-60 each and two gender, i.e., male 

and female) who will be given a questionnaire. The participants will be selected by 

giving it to family members, close friends and relatives. The sampling method to be 

used is non probability convenience sampling to select participants. The elements 

that will be characteristic of the sample will be sex, age, region and number of 

family members. An effort will be made to collect data proportionately from male 

and female sex, the age groups and the region. Also, shopkeepers of two Patanjali 

Shops and some general stores will be interviewed. The two Patanjali shops are: 

PatanjaliAarogya Kendra, Manoj Villa, Station Road, Vile Parle West, Mumbai – 

400056 

PatanjaliChikitsalya, 241, Chandra Mahal Building, Princess Street, Mumbai – 

400002 

3.3 Sampling Procedures 

A non-probability convenience sampling procedure will be used. 

3.4 Methods and Instuments of Data Gathering 

Instrument #1 Questionnaire - Materials included is a questionnaire which include 

14 questions which is given in the appendix A. The survey will measure the various 

independent variables using Likert scale and after primary data collection the data 

will be analysed using factor analysis with the help of SPSS. Also the distribution 




Nestle etc. 

6366

ISSN: 2347-1697 




network most preferred by consumers and products which consumers hope Patanjali 

should manufacture but is not in their product mix are asked. Even the buying 

frequency and how consumers stumbled upon Patanjali will be asked besides the 

usual demographic data. 

Instrument #2 Interview – The interview questions for the shopkeepers are included 

in the appendix B. For the interview part, shopkeepers of Patanjali shops will be 

asked their products which are the most selling and also in shortage, the products 

which are lying in the inventory and have low sales volume and lastly the products 

which consumers enquire about but Patanjali doesn’t manufacture. 

Instrument #3 Observation – The buying behaviour of the consumers in 

supermarkets and the interne will be observed under the ethnographic study to know 

which products the consumers buy the most. 

A questionnaire will be given to Patanjali consumers to know why they prefer 

Patanjali over other brands such as HUL, P&G and Nestle and the factors which are 

most influencing. A personal interview with Patanjali shopkeepers will be conducted 

about the FMCG products which are so much in demand that there is shortage for 

them, products which are not sold much and lead to too much inventory in the 

shelves and products about which customers inquire but Patanjali doesn’t 

manufacture so that it gives them an opportunity in the various categories of 

nutrition and supplements, grocery, home care, personal care and health care and if 

possible the quantitative data to support these answers will be noted. For e- 

commerce websites like Big Basket, Relaince Fresh Direct, ZopNow and Grofers, 

we will try to find the popular products and the shortage products and try to validate 

it with our previous data. A similar personal interview can be conducted for general 

stores. In supermarkets like Big Bazaar, Relaince Retail, D Mart, Spencer’s Retail 

and HyperCITY we can collect data by mere observation about the products which 

consumers buy. 

3.5 Methods of Data Analysis 

The methods of data analysis we are going to use are ANOVA, factor analysis and 

correlation analysis using SPSS. 

IV. ANALYSIS AND RESULTS 

Gender, age and number of family members might have a relationship with various 

perceptions. An analysis of variance (ANOVA) tested the perception level of people on 

various factors by gender (female, male), age (20-34, 35-60) and number of family members 

(1-5, 6-10) each independently. We used a level of significance of 0.05 for all statistical 

tests. 

Gender, age and number of family members might have a relationship with the 

quality perception. People with different age showed a relationship with the quality 

perception (F (1, 91) = 6.790, p = 0.011). Older people (n = 34, M = 4.000, SD = 0.7385) 




Nestle etc. 

6367

ISSN: 2347-1697 




think more that the quality of Patanjali products is better than other brands than younger 

people (n = 59, M = 3.492, SD = 0.9891). 

Gender, age and number of family members might have a relationship with Baba 

Ramdev’s spirituality perception. People with different age showed a relationship with Baba 

Ramdev’s spirituality perception (F (1, 91) = 6.790, p = 0.000).Older people (n = 34, M = 

3.412, SD = 1.2090) believe more that Baba Ramdev’s spirituality attracts them towards 

Patanjali products than younger people (n = 59, M = 2.237, SD = 1.0058). 

Gender, age and number of family members might have a relationship with 

indigenous manufacturing perception. People with different age showed a relationship with 

indigenous manufacturing perception (F (1, 91) = 15.982, p = 0.000).Older people (n = 34, 

M = 4.324, SD = 0.8061) think indigenous manufacturing influences them to buy Patanjali 

products more than younger people (n = 59, M = 3.458, SD = 1.1036). 


ayurvedic perception. People with different gender showed a relationship with the ayurvedic 

perception (F (1, 91) = 4.484, p = 0.037). Female (n = 47, M = 4.085, SD = 0.8554) think 

that the ayurvedic properties of Patanjali products influences them to use it more than male 

(n = 46, M = 3.674, SD = 1.0122). 


experience perception. People with different age showed a relationship with the experience 

perception (F (1, 91) = 10.122, p = 0.002). Older people (n = 34, M = 4.235, SD = 0.6060) 

think that their overall experience with the products of Patanjali is better than younger 

people (n = 59, M = 3.695, SD = 0.8760). 

Oneway 

Gender 

0.0 = Female 

1.0 = Male 

Table 1: Descriptives 

95% 

Confidence 

Interval for 

Mean 

Std. Std. Lower Upper 

N Mean Deviation Error Bound Bound Minimum Maximum 

Price .0 47 3.574 .8532 .1245 3.324 3.825 2.0 5.0 

1.0 46 3.500 .9832 .1450 3.208 3.792 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.538 .9156 .0949 3.349 3.726 1.0 5.0 

Advertisements .0 47 3.383 1.0540 .1537 3.073 3.692 1.0 5.0 

1.0 46 2.935 1.1624 .1714 2.590 3.280 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.161 1.1257 .1167 2.929 3.393 1.0 5.0 

Quality .0 47 3.787 .8324 .1214 3.543 4.032 1.0 5.0 

1.0 46 3.565 1.0253 .1512 3.261 3.870 1.0 5.0 

Baba Ramdev's 

spirituality 

Total 93 3.677 .9344 .0969 3.485 3.870 1.0 5.0 

.0 47 2.745 1.2763 .1862 2.370 3.119 1.0 5.0 

1.0 46 2.587 1.1657 .1719 2.241 2.933 1.0 5.0 




Nestle etc. 

6368

Indigenous 

manufacturing 

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Total 93 2.667 1.2188 .1264 2.416 2.918 1.0 5.0 

.0 47 3.766 1.0470 .1527 3.459 4.073 1.0 5.0 

1.0 46 3.783 1.1336 .1671 3.446 4.119 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.774 1.0848 .1125 3.551 3.998 1.0 5.0 

Ayurvedic .0 47 4.085 .8554 .1248 3.834 4.336 1.0 5.0 

1.0 46 3.674 1.0122 .1492 3.373 3.975 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.882 .9538 .0989 3.685 4.078 1.0 5.0 

Available .0 47 3.191 1.0558 .1540 2.881 3.501 1.0 5.0 

1.0 46 3.239 .9703 .1431 2.951 3.527 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.215 1.0092 .1046 3.007 3.423 1.0 5.0 

Recommendations .0 47 3.702 1.0615 .1548 3.390 4.014 1.0 5.0 

1.0 46 3.674 .9441 .1392 3.394 3.954 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.688 .9998 .1037 3.482 3.894 1.0 5.0 

Experience .0 47 3.936 .7634 .1114 3.712 4.160 1.0 5.0 

1.0 46 3.848 .8936 .1318 3.582 4.113 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.892 .8270 .0858 3.722 4.063 1.0 5.0 

Table 2: ANOVA 

Sum of Squares df Mean Square F Sig. 

Price Between Groups .129 1 .129 .152 .697 

Within Groups 76.989 91 .846 

Total 77.118 92 

Advertisements Between Groups 4.670 1 4.670 3.797 .054 

Within Groups 111.911 91 1.230 

Total 116.581 92 

Quality Between Groups 1.146 1 1.146 1.317 .254 


Total 80.323 92 

Baba Ramdev's spirituality Between Groups .578 1 .578 .387 .536 

Within Groups 136.088 91 1.495 

Total 136.667 92 

Indigenous manufacturing Between Groups .006 1 .006 .005 .941 

Within Groups 108.252 91 1.190 

Total 108.258 92 

Ayurvedic Between Groups 3.931 1 3.931 4.484 .037 


Total 83.699 92 

Available Between Groups .053 1 .053 .051 .821 

Within Groups 93.646 91 1.029 

Total 93.699 92 

Recommendations Between Groups .019 1 .019 .018 .893 


Total 91.957 92 

Experience Between Groups .181 1 .181 .263 .609 


Total 62.925 92 




Nestle etc. 

6369

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Oneway 

Age 

0.0 = 20 - 34 

1.0 = 35-60 


95% 

Confidence 

Interval for 

Mean 



Price .0 59 3.492 .9168 .1194 3.253 3.730 1.0 5.0 

1.0 34 3.618 .9216 .1581 3.296 3.939 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.538 .9156 .0949 3.349 3.726 1.0 5.0 


1.0 34 3.324 1.1735 .2012 2.914 3.733 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.161 1.1257 .1167 2.929 3.393 1.0 5.0 

Quality .0 59 3.492 .9891 .1288 3.234 3.749 1.0 5.0 

1.0 34 4.000 .7385 .1267 3.742 4.258 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.677 .9344 .0969 3.485 3.870 1.0 5.0 

Baba Ramdev's .0 59 2.237 1.0058 .1309 1.975 2.499 1.0 5.0 

spirituality 1.0 34 3.412 1.2090 .2073 2.990 3.834 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 2.667 1.2188 .1264 2.416 2.918 1.0 5.0 

Indigenous 

manufacturing 

.0 59 3.458 1.1036 .1437 3.170 3.745 1.0 5.0 

1.0 34 4.324 .8061 .1382 4.042 4.605 2.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.774 1.0848 .1125 3.551 3.998 1.0 5.0 

Ayurvedic .0 59 3.746 .9209 .1199 3.506 3.986 1.0 5.0 

1.0 34 4.118 .9775 .1676 3.777 4.459 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.882 .9538 .0989 3.685 4.078 1.0 5.0 

Available .0 59 3.322 .9727 .1266 3.069 3.576 1.0 5.0 

1.0 34 3.029 1.0585 .1815 2.660 3.399 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.215 1.0092 .1046 3.007 3.423 1.0 5.0 

Recommendations .0 59 3.695 .9871 .1285 3.438 3.952 1.0 5.0 

1.0 34 3.676 1.0363 .1777 3.315 4.038 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.688 .9998 .1037 3.482 3.894 1.0 5.0 

Experience .0 59 3.695 .8760 .1140 3.467 3.923 1.0 5.0 

1.0 34 4.235 .6060 .1039 4.024 4.447 3.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.892 .8270 .0858 3.722 4.063 1.0 5.0 


Sum of Mean 

Squares Df Square F Sig. 

Price Between Groups .343 1 .343 .407 .525 


Total 77.118 92 

Advertisements Between Groups 1.411 1 1.411 1.115 .294 




Nestle etc. 

6370

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Within Groups 115.170 91 1.266 

Total 116.581 92 

Quality Between Groups 5.577 1 5.577 6.790 .011 


Total 80.323 92 

Baba Ramdev's Between Groups 29.753 1 29.753 25.325 .000 

spirituality 

Within Groups 106.913 91 1.175 

Indigenous 

manufacturing 

Total 136.667 92 

Between Groups 16.173 1 16.173 15.982 .000 


Total 108.258 92 

Ayurvedic Between Groups 2.983 1 2.983 3.363 .070 


Total 83.699 92 

Available Between Groups 1.847 1 1.847 1.830 .179 


Total 93.699 92 

Recommendations Between Groups .007 1 .007 .007 .932 


Total 91.957 92 

Experience Between Groups 6.299 1 6.299 10.122 .002 


Total 62.925 92 

Oneway 

Number of family members 

0.0 = 1 - 5 

1.0 = 6 - 10 


95% 

Confidence 

Interval for 

Mean 



Price .0 75 3.533 .9054 .1046 3.325 3.742 1.0 5.0 

1.0 18 3.556 .9835 .2318 3.066 4.045 2.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.538 .9156 .0949 3.349 3.726 1.0 5.0 


1.0 18 3.056 1.3048 .3076 2.407 3.704 1.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.161 1.1257 .1167 2.929 3.393 1.0 5.0 

Quality .0 75 3.680 .9886 .1142 3.453 3.907 1.0 5.0 

1.0 18 3.667 .6860 .1617 3.326 4.008 3.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.677 .9344 .0969 3.485 3.870 1.0 5.0 

Baba Ramdev's .0 75 2.693 1.2837 .1482 2.398 2.989 1.0 5.0 

spirituality 1.0 18 2.556 .9218 .2173 2.097 3.014 1.0 4.0 

Total 93 2.667 1.2188 .1264 2.416 2.918 1.0 5.0 




Nestle etc. 

6371

Indigenous 

manufacturing 

ISSN: 2347-1697 




.0 75 3.800 1.1271 .1301 3.541 4.059 1.0 5.0 

1.0 18 3.667 .9075 .2139 3.215 4.118 2.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.774 1.0848 .1125 3.551 3.998 1.0 5.0 

Ayurvedic .0 75 3.893 1.0077 .1164 3.661 4.125 1.0 5.0 

1.0 18 3.833 .7071 .1667 3.482 4.185 2.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.882 .9538 .0989 3.685 4.078 1.0 5.0 

Available .0 75 3.160 1.0140 .1171 2.927 3.393 1.0 5.0 

1.0 18 3.444 .9835 .2318 2.955 3.934 2.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.215 1.0092 .1046 3.007 3.423 1.0 5.0 

Recommendations .0 75 3.653 1.0590 .1223 3.410 3.897 1.0 5.0 

1.0 18 3.833 .7071 .1667 3.482 4.185 2.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.688 .9998 .1037 3.482 3.894 1.0 5.0 

Experience .0 75 3.893 .8314 .0960 3.702 4.085 1.0 5.0 

1.0 18 3.889 .8324 .1962 3.475 4.303 3.0 5.0 

Total 93 3.892 .8270 .0858 3.722 4.063 1.0 5.0 

Price 

Advertisements 

Quality 

Baba 

spirituality 

Indigenous 

manufacturing 

Ayurvedic 

Available 

Ramdev's 


Sum of Mean 

Squares Df Square F Sig. 

Between 

Groups 

.007 1 .007 .008 .927 


Total 77.118 92 

Between 

Groups 

.250 1 .250 .195 .660 

Within Groups 116.331 91 1.278 

Total 116.581 92 

Between 

Groups 

.003 1 .003 .003 .957 


Total 80.323 92 

Between 

Groups 

.276 1 .276 .184 .669 

Within Groups 136.391 91 1.499 

Total 136.667 92 

Between 

Groups 

.258 1 .258 .217 .642 

Within Groups 108.000 91 1.187 

Total 108.258 92 

Between 

Groups 

.052 1 .052 .057 .812 


Total 83.699 92 

Between 

Groups 

1.174 1 1.174 1.155 .285 


Total 93.699 92 




Nestle etc. 

6372

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Recommendations 

Experience 

Between 

Groups 

.470 1 .470 .468 .496 


Total 91.957 92 

Between 

Groups 

.000 1 .000 .000 .984 


Total 62.925 92 

Factor Analysis is used to explore the factors that affect the consumers of Patanjali. The 

descriptive statistics of the factor responses are measured. 

Table 7: Descriptive Statistics 

Mean Std. Deviation Analysis N 

Price 3.538 .9156 93 

Advertisements 3.161 1.1257 93 

Quality 3.677 .9344 93 

Baba Ramdev's spirituality 2.667 1.2188 93 

Indigenous manufacturing 3.774 1.0848 93 

Ayurvedic 3.882 .9538 93 

Availability 3.215 1.0092 93 

Recommendations 3.688 .9998 93 

Experience 3.892 .8270 93 

Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling Adequacy - This measure varies between 0 and 

1. A value of 0.6 is a suggested minimum. The KMO measure for our analysis is 0.633 and 

shows that the numbers of samples we have taken are adequate. 

Bartlett's Test of Sphericity - This tests the null hypothesis that the correlation matrix is an 

identity matrix. The measure should be less than 0.05. The significance value of our 

Bartlett’s Test is 0.00. Hence the null hypothesis is rejected and a relationship exists 

between the factors. 

Table 8: KMO and Bartlett's Test 

Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling Adequacy. .633 

Bartlett's Test of Sphericity Approx. Chi-Square 164.783 

Df 36 

Sig. .000 

Taken together, these tests provide a minimum standard which should be passed before a 

factor analysis (or a principal components analysis) should be conducted. In our analysis we 

have taken 9 variables, so we have 9 factors. We look only for the components that have 

eigenvalues of 1 or more. So we determine how many components meet this criterion. The 

initial eigenvalues for each component are listed in the 1 st column. Only the components 1, 2 

and 3 have eigenvalues more than 1. So we can look at the percentage of variance that each 

component explains. Component 1 has 30.231% variance, Component 2 has 16.262% 

variance and Component 3 has 12.665% variance which gives us a cumulative variance of 




Nestle etc. 

6373

ISSN: 2347-1697 




59.158% explained by these three components. So these three components have major 

variance within this set of data. 

Table 9: Total Variance Explained 

Extraction Sums of Squared Rotation Sums of Squared 

Initial Eigenvalues Loadings 

Loadings 

% of Cumulative % of Cumulative % of 

Component Total Variance % Total Variance % Total Variance 

1 2.721 30.231 30.231 2.721 30.231 30.231 2.051 22.784 22.784 

2 1.464 16.262 46.493 1.464 16.262 46.493 1.770 19.666 42.450 

3 1.140 12.665 59.158 1.140 12.665 59.158 1.504 16.708 59.158 

4 .942 10.472 69.630 

5 .783 8.699 78.329 

6 .641 7.117 85.446 

7 .580 6.450 91.895 

8 .460 5.113 97.009 

9 .269 2.991 100.000 


The scree plot graphs the eigenvalue against the component number. We look for a change 

for an elbow in the line. The only components above this break for elbow are retained. The 

elbow breaks at component 3. So this explains that component 1, 2 and 3 captures much 

more variance than any other component, while other successive components are accounting 

for smaller and smaller amounts of the total variance. So we can suggest retaining only 

component 1, 2 and 3. A plot of the eigenvalues is provided below. 

Cumulative 

% 

Figure 1: Screen Plot 




Nestle etc. 

6374

ISSN: 2347-1697 




The three components tell us about the major factors which should be considered first when 

understanding the consumers of Patanjali products. In component 1, the most important 

factor is advertisements whose value is 0.783. It means around 63 % variance in component 

1 is explained by advertisements. It is followed by quality, experience and price showing 

strong coefficients. This means that the 1 st component is Value Communication. In 

component 2 we have recommendations and ayurvedic as the important factors. Hence we 

call this factor Word of Mouth because we know that people give recommendations about 

ayurvedic products. In component 3 we have Baba Ramdev’s spirituality and indigenous 

manufacturing. We can call this Baba Ramdev’s indigenous factor as we can see Baba 

Ramdev promoting the swadeshi concept and hence people are getting attracted towards 

Patanjali. 

Table 10: Rotated Component Matrix a 

Component 

1 2 3 

Advertisements .738 -.113 .033 

Quality .711 .353 .134 

Experience .680 .473 .121 

Price .619 -.041 -.125 

Recommendations -.090 .783 -.078 

Ayurvedic .341 .646 .145 

Indigenous manufacturing .144 .244 .790 

Baba Ramdev's 

-.026 

spirituality 

.479 .527 

Availability .093 .295 -.725 


Rotation Method: Varimax with Kaiser Normalization. 

a. Rotation converged in 5 iterations. 

For correlation analysis, it is a thumb rule that if the value of p is less than 0.05 then the 

correlation is considered to be significant. The values of Pearson coefficient is from -1 to 

1.The closer the value is to -1 to +1, the stronger the association is between the variables. In 

this case, we have a positive correlation between quality and price with the value of p = 

0.006 and r = 0.281 which means that there is a weak correlation, indicating the increase of 

price would lead to a slight increase in quality. 

Table 11 : Correlations 

Price Quality 

Price Pearson Correlation 1 .281 ** 

Sig. (2-tailed) .006 

N 93 93 

Quality Pearson Correlation .281 ** 1 


N 93 93 

**. Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed). 




Nestle etc. 

6375

ISSN: 2347-1697 




We have a positive correlation between quality and indigenous manufacturing with the 

value of p = 0.009 and r = 0.271 which means that there is a weak correlation, indicating the 

increase of indigenous manufacturing would lead to a slight increase in quality. 


Indigenous 

Quality Manufacturing 

Quality Pearson Correlation 1 .271 ** 


N 93 93 

Indigenous manufacturing Pearson Correlation .271 ** 1 


N 93 93 


We have a positive correlation between indigenous manufacturing and Baba Ramdev's 

spirituality with the value of p = 0.000 and r = 0.378 which means that they are moderately 

correlated, indicating the increase of Baba Ramdev's spirituality would lead to a moderate 

increase in the indigenous manufacturing. 


Indigenous Baba Ramdev's 

manufacturing spirituality 

Indigenous manufacturing Pearson Correlation 1 .378 ** 


N 93 93 

Baba Ramdev's spirituality Pearson Correlation .378 ** 1 


N 93 93 


We have a positive correlation between Ayurvedic products and quality with the value of p 

= 0.000 and r = 0.445 which means that they are moderately correlated, indicating the 

increase of Ayurvedic manufacturing would lead to a moderate increase in quality. 


Ayurvedic Quality 

Ayurvedic Pearson Correlation 1 .445 ** 


N 93 93 

Quality Pearson Correlation .445 ** 1 


N 93 93 





Nestle etc. 

6376

ISSN: 2347-1697 




We have a positive correlation between Ayurvedic manufacturing and Baba Ramdev's 

spirituality with the value of p = 0.010 and r = 0.265 which means that there is a weak 

correlation, indicating the increase of Baba Ramdev promoting the use of ayurvedic 

products would lead to a slight increase in Ayurvedic manufacturing. 


Ayurvedic Baba Ramdev's spirituality 

Ayurvedic Pearson Correlation 1 .265 * 


N 93 93 

Baba Ramdev's spirituality Pearson Correlation .265 * 1 


N 93 93 

*. Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level (2-tailed). 

We have a positive correlation between indigenous manufacturing and Ayurvedic products 

with the value of p = 0.002 and r = 0.321 which means that there is a moderate correlation, 

indicating the increase of indigenous manufacturing would lead to a moderate increase in 

usage of Ayurvedic products by the consumers. 


Indigenous manufacturing Ayurvedic 

Indigenous manufacturing Pearson Correlation 1 .321 ** 


N 93 93 

Ayurvedic Pearson Correlation .321 ** 1 


N 93 93 


We have a negative correlation between Indigenous manufacturing and availability with the 

value of p = 0.004 and r = -0.293 which means that there is a weak correlation, indicating 

Indigenous manufacturing would lead to a decrease in availability. As we can see large 

companies like HUL, P&G outsource their manufacturing activities and only concentrate on 

marketing activities. Hence, they do not have any availability issues in the market. 


Indigenous 

manufacturing Available 

Indigenous manufacturing Pearson Correlation 1 -.293 ** 


N 93 93 

Availability Pearson Correlation -.293 ** 1 


N 93 93 


We have a positive correlation between recommendations and Ayurvedic manufacturing 

with the value of p = 0.002 and r = 0.314 which means that they are moderately correlated, 




Nestle etc. 

6377

ISSN: 2347-1697 




indicating the increase of word of mouth would lead to a moderate increase in Ayurvedic 

manufacturing. 


Recommendations Ayurvedic 

Recommendations Pearson Correlation 1 .314 ** 


N 93 93 

Ayurvedic Pearson Correlation .314 ** 1 


N 93 93 


From the various distribution channels, this is a compiled product portfolio of the bestselling 

products of Patanjali. 

Table 19: Popular Patanjali Products 

Patanjali Products 

Popular 

Nutrition and Supplements Chyawanprash 

Chyawanprash 

Chyawanprash Special 

Badam Pak 

Special Kesar Chyawanprash 

Ghee 

Badam Pak 

Honey 

Ghee 

Health Drinks 

Cow Ghee 

Fruit Juice 

Honey 

Honey Pure 

Health Drinks 

Aloevera Juice/ Fibre Juice 

Amla Juice 

Grocery 

Biscuits and Cookies 

Spices 

Candy 

Herbal Tea 

Jam 

Murabba 

Soan Papdi 

Natural Sugar 

Broken Cereals (Dalia) 

Gram Flour (Besan) 

Pickle 

Salt 

Mustard Oil 

Corn Flakes 

Dal (Pulses) 

Rice 

Noodles 

Oats 

Wheat Atta 

Navratna Atta 

Biscuits and Cookies 

Marie 

Namkeen 

Jam 

Jam Mixed Fruit 

Murabba 

Amla Murabba 

Pickle 

Awla Pickle 

Mustard Oil 

Sarso Tel (Mustard) 

Noodles 

Atta Noodles 




Nestle etc. 

6378

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Papad 

Namkeen 

Bura 

Home Care 

Agarbatti 

Dish Wash Bar 

Herbal Gulal 

Personal Care 

Skin Care 

Body Care 

Face Wash 

Face Cream 

Face Pack 

Foot Cream 

Shave Gel 

Scrubs 

Dental Care 

Toothpaste 

Tooth Brush 

Tooth Powder (Manjan) 

Hair Care 

Shampoo 

Hair Oil 

Conditioner 

Hair Color 

Body Care 

Toiletries 

Detergent Powder 

Detergent Cake 

Hand Wash 

Soaps 

Eye Care 

Dish Wash Bar 

Super Dish Wash Bar 

Skin Care 

Body Care 

Tejus Body Lotion 

Face Wash 

Face Wash Saundarya 

Gel Aloevera 

Gulab Jal 

Face Wash Neem Tulsi 

Face Cream 

Anti Wrinkle Cream 

Beauty Cream 

Moisturizer Cream 

Shave Gel 

Herbal Shave Gel 

Dental Care 

Toothpaste 

Tooth Paste Dant Kanti 

Hair Care 

Shampoo 

Shampoo Kesh Kanti Natural 

Shampoo Milk Protein Shikakai 

Kesh Kanti Anti Dandruff Hair Cleanser Shampoo 

Kesh Kanti Reetha Hair Cleanser Silk & Shine 

Toiletries 

Detergent Powder 

Premium Detergent Powder (Machine) 

Detergent Cake 

Detergent Bar With Herbs 

Hand Wash 

Herbal Hand Wash 

Soaps 

Soap Ojas 

Soap Mogra 

Soap Multani Mitti 

Neem Kanti 

Haldi Chandan 

Aloe Vera Kanti 

Panchgavya Kanti Soap 




Nestle etc. 

6379

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Health Care 

Digestives 

Health and Wellness 

Rose Body Cleanser 

V. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS 

Restatement of the Problem 

The problem is to understand the important factors that affect the consumers on which Patanjali 

should concentrate and within these factors see how the demographics affected and to identify 

the best selling product of Patanjali and see which more products that consumer want Patanjali 

to manufacture to diversify their product portfolio and in turn grab more market share. 

Description of Procedures 

We used a questionnaire to find the various factors that affect consumers according to gender, 

age and number of family members. We interviewed shopkeepers about the products of Patanjali 

and also found out the popular Patanjali products on e-commerce websites such as ZopNow, 

Bigbasket, Snapdeal, supermarkets such as Reliancefreshdirect and the official Patanjali website. 

Major Findings 

We find that gender and age have a relationship with the various factors in determining the 

consumer’s perception towards Patanjali products. People with older age are more inclined 

towards the quality, Baba Ramdev’s spirituality, indigenous manufacturing and experience 

perception while in gender, female are more influenced by the ayurvedic products than male. 

Thus we accept the first alternate hypothesis. By factor analysis we find that Patanjali should 

mainly focus on advertisement, quality, price and experience which would ultimately lead to 

value communication. The next think automatically works for them as people give positive word 

of mouth or recommendation about Patanjali’s ayurvedic products. The last thing which they 

should focus upon is Baba Ramdev promoting swadeshi manufacturing. After promoting it 

towards consumers, Baba Ramdev has started promoting it to the shopkeepers also recently. 

Thus we accept the second alternate hypothesis. We have also found a basket of products of the 

most popular Patanjali products. 

Conclusion and Implications 

Thus it reinforces our objectives that there is a relationship between the demographics and the 

perception of Patanjali products and also the important factors for Patanjali.Baba Ramdev should 

promote swadeshi more towards younger generation as older people are by default influenced 

with it. Patanjali should try to convey the quality of products to men. Patanjali has increased 

their advertisement expenditure and this can be seen in our results where advertisement is the 

most important factor for consumers which are value communication. 

Recommendations 

Baba Ramdev should promote swadeshi more towards younger generation because older 

people are already influenced by swadeshi products. 

They should spend more on advertisements as we can see the returns on the advertisement 

perception of the consumers. It should be targeted more towards women as they get easily 

influenced wherever they see the health benefits of their family as they buy Patanjali 

products more frequently because they are the homemaker. 

The bestselling products on which they should focus are given in the analysis. 




Nestle etc. 

6380

ISSN: 2347-1697 




The products which they should manufacture according to consumers are pasta, soft drinks, 

make up kit, variety in hair colours, daily product like cheese, ice-cream, paneer, variety of 

sweets to distribute in festivals, sunscreens, perfumes, dairy products, milk, body wash, 

chocolates, cosmetics, hair dye, they must be available in smaller packages / refill packs, 

condoms, birth control pills, wines, anti repellent cream, hair gel, hair removal cream, 

bathroom cleaner like sunny floor cleaner, hair color, bread, oil, chips and dips, cheap 

stationery and books, muscle builder WEH protein like Endura Mass and baby products. 

Limitations of the study 

Region wise data couldn’t be collected. 

The out of stock popular products were not identified. 

Scope for future research 

We can further identify popular out of stock products on which Patanjali should focus. 

According to the region wise data we can identify clusters and their product preference. 


[1] Bhushan, R. (2015, December 28). Baba Ramdev’s Patanjali becoming contender in consumer 

goods space; rival companies brace up for threat. ET Bureau, pp. 1 Retrieved from 

http://articles.economictimes.indiatimes.com/2015-12-28/news/69356627_1_products-sunilduggal-consumer-goods-space 

[2] Khasgiwala, V and Bapat, H. A Yogic Business Revolution: Back to the Future! IOSR Journal 

of Business and Management (IOSR-JBM), 1, pp.59-67 

[3] Kumar, V., Jain, A., Rahman, Z., and Jain, A. (2014, 15 May). Marketing through Spirituality: A 

Case of Patanjali Yogpeeth. Procedia – Social and Behavioral Sciences, 133, pp. 481-490 

[4] Rani, S. and Shukla, C. (2012, 9 September). Trend of Patanjali Products: An Ayurvedic Magic 

Wand for Healthy Living. Paripex – Indian Journal Of Research, 1(9), pp.93-94 

[5] Roy, A., Lath, P. and Sharma, T. (2015, October 1). PATANJALI AYURVED Waiting in the 

wings. Edelweiss, pp.1-16 

VII. BIOGRAPHIES 

Dr. Anuja Agarwal is Associate Dean-Technology Management 

MPSTME, NMIMS Mumbai. She has a Ph.D. in Management Studies 

(Ph.D. Topic: Study of Applying Creativity, Design Thinking and 

Innovation in Management Education) - Mumbai University and MCA, 

B.Sc. (Computer Science). Her areas of specialization are Design 

Thinking and Innovation in Management and Human Computer 

Interaction .She has contributed in over 10 research papers which 

consist of 6 International and 4 National Papers. She has also authored 

2 case studies and is a keen speaker in various seminars and 

conferences. Apart from that she has also co-authored in the section 

titled ‘Design Management in India’ in the Handbook of Design Management, published by Berg 

Publishers, UK in 2011.With a work experience of 24 years, including as a Visiting Faculty for 

Design Thinking & Leadership at Malardalen University, Sweden, she has also conducted courses 

on Innovation, Developed a Multidisciplinary Course on “Smart Cities” being offered to the students 

from all other schools under the NMIMS University. 

Some of her recent achievements include: 




Nestle etc. 

6381

ISSN: 2347-1697 




i.) 

ii.) 

Order of Merit Award for Academic Program on Smart Cities at the Business World Smart Cities 

Conclave and Awards Function in New Delhi on the 21st December 2016. 

Kyoto Design Lab Innovation Prize – The Team Won the First Prize For Developing a Low-Cost 

Product to Help Manage ‘Freezing’ in a Parkinson’s Disease Patient, at the 24hr Design 

Challenge in July 2015 at the Design4Health Conference held at Sheffield Hallam University, 

England. 

Sakshi Gupta was born in Sri Ganganagar, Rajasthan on the 20 th of 

March, 1993. She is a final year student pursuing MBA (Tech.) Civil 

with Operations, Project and Infrastructure Management as 

Management Major at MPSTME, NMIMS Mumbai. She has worked as 

an intern in the construction sector and Kalyani Steels Limited, a 

reputed steel manufacturing sector company, in their Corporate Office 

in Pune under the guidance of the Top Management. She was also an 

Executive in Finance and Treasury Department for Civil Engineering 

Student Association (CESA) from 2013 to 2015. Her research interests 

include in the areas of operations, FMCG industry and technology 

management. 

Srashti Gupta is a final year student pursuing MBA (Tech.) Civil with 

Finance as major at MPSTME, NMIMS Mumbai. She has undertaken 

internships in construction sector and also as a project management 

intern at Shapoorji Pallonji Pvt. Ltd., helping with the coordination and 

key deliverables processes. Her research interests include the areas of 

technology management, affordable housing and real estate financing 

& pricing strategies. 

Vinayak Nautiyal was born in Bombay on the 12 th of September, 1994. 

He is a final year student pursuing MBA (Tech.) Civil with Finance as 

Management Major at MPSTME, NMIMS Mumbai. He has worked as 

an intern in the realty sector and the investment banking division. His 

research interests includes in the areas of technology management and 

financial technology. 


Agarwal, A. , Gupta, S., Gupta, S. , Nautiya, V.l (2017) :: “The Impact of Patanjali 

Products on the FMCG Business Hither to Dominated by Multi-Nationals like Hul, 

P&G, Nestle etc.” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 





Nestle etc. 

6382

www.ijifr.com 



Establishing the Relationship Between 

Learning Style and Leadership Potential 

of Higher Secondary Students of Different 

School Background 


Key Words 

Learning Styles, Higher Secondary Students, Trichy Educational District 

Dr. R. Portia 


Department of Education, 

Alagappa University College of Education, 

Alagappa University, Karaikudi -Tamil Nadu 

Abstract 

Learning style of an individual is of a natural formation as in the case of 

eating or dressing styles. The concept of learning is often attributed to the 

availability of learning situations. However, the learnability of an 

individual is stated to be associated with the learning style which the 

individual has developed in filtering out necessary information and storing 

it up for future use in varied situations. In other words, learning style is 

something pertaining to an intellectual act which an individual adopts in 

learning situations almost in the same manner suitable for his individuality 

as well as his psychological makeup bestowed on him by birth or learned 

from the associating environments since childhood. Therefore, learning 

style is an individual’s natural or habitual pattern of acquiring and 

processing information in learning situations. This paper presents the 

dominance of the four learning styles possessed by higher secondary 

students in total and in terms of schools background. The researcher 

endeavored to find the level of leadership potential of higher secondary 

students in total and in terms of schools background. Population selected for 

the present study comprises all the higher secondary students studying in 

higher secondary schools, located in Trichy educational district. 


The idea of individualized learning styles in fact originated in 1970s and greatly influenced 

educationists to make use of learning styles in education. Though there are criticisms against 

. 



6383

ISSN: 2347-1697 




the emphasis on learning styles in structuring methods of teaching, it has gained 

overwhelming support among the practicing teachers. The mode of teaching uniquely 

designed to suit the learners of different learning styles received support from all those 

interested in quality education. Among the experts known for proposing theories based on 

experimentations about the advantage of adopting learning style based classroom teaching, 

David A. Kolb’s model has emerged very prominent for providing experiential learning. 

Kolb’s model in the beginning placed four types of learning styles as concrete experience, 

abstract conceptualization, reflective observation, and active experimentation. According to 

Kolb’s model the ideal learning process engages all four of these modes in response to 

situational demands. In order for learning to be effective all four of these approaches must 

be incorporated. When individuals attempt to use all four approaches, the resulting learning 

styles are combinations of the individuals preferred approaches. These learning styles are 

given as i. Converger, ii. Diverger, iii. Assimilator, iv. Accommodator. 

In many of the studies pertaining to learning outcome, the sources of learning are 

attributed to three prominent categories of learning styles such as visual, auditory, and 

kinesthetic, and accordingly the learners are classified as visual learners, aural learners, and 

kinesthetic learners. The Swinburne University of Technology has published an instrument 

named as ‘VAK Learning Styles Self Assessment Questionnaire’ consisting of thirty 

statements for each of which the respondents have to choose one of three alternatives 

( 2 Retrived). However, Kolb’s learning styles seem to be still effective as researchers Peter 

Honey and Alan Mumford (2006) have adapted the same with four learning styles slightly 

modified to suit the learners who are to be classified as Activist, Reflector, Theorist, and 

Pragmatist ( 3 Retrived). Inspite of such modifications in Kolb’s model of learning styles, the 

Researcher still hopes that the original four learning styles put forth by Kolb seems to be 

more logical and scientific. Therefore, the researcher prepared and validated a learning style 

inventory making use of the four original learning styles – Converger, Diverger, 

Assimilator, and Accommodator. 

II. BACKGROUND AND REVIEW 

Researchers have started using brain imaging technologies which are helpful for 

them to find out the key areas of the brain responsible for each learning style. For example, 

Visual: the occipital lobes at the back of the brain manage the visual sense. Both the 

occipital and parietal lobes manage spatial orientation. Aural: the temporal lobes handle 

aural content. The right temporal lobes are especially important to music. Verbal: the 

temporal and frontal lobes, especially two specialized areas called Brocai and wernickei 

areas (in the left hemisphere of these two lobes). Physical: the cerebellum and the motor 

cortex (at the back of the frontal lobe) handle much of our physical movement. Logical: the 

parietal lobes especially the left side, drive for logical thinking. Social: the frontal and 

temporal lobes handle much of our social activities. The Limbic system (not shown apart 

from the hippocampus) also influences both the social and solitary styles. The limbic system 

Dr. R. Portia :: Establishing the Relationship Between Learning 

Style and Leadership Potential of Higher Secondary Students of 

Different School Background 

6384

ISSN: 2347-1697 




has a lot to do with emotions, moods and aggression. Solitary: the frontal and parietal lobes, 

and the limbic system, are also active with this style ( 4 Retrived). 

Similarly, another most widely used model of learning style is ‘The Index of 

Learning Styles’ developed by Richard Felder and Linda Silverman in late 1980s. 

According to this model, there are four dimensions of learning styles, treating these 

dimensions as a continuum with one learning preference on the far left and the other on the 

far right. Using these learning style index to develop one’s own learning skills and to help 

create a rounded learning experience for other people they have suggested three steps – step 

1, step2, and step 3. Based on the outcome of the index in these steps, eight type of learners 

can be identified ( 5 Retrieved). 

Brunton, Bruce (2015) used the Kolb learning style inventory to assess individual 

student learning styles. The results indicate that the student learning style has no significant 

effect on performance undermining the claims of those who advocate greater instructional 

design concern for different learning styles. 

However, the study reported by Sitar, Alesa Sasa, et al (2011) has indicated that 

learning style is important for creative performance. In addition to exploring the relationship 

between learning style and creativity, the researchers reported here, tested self efficacy and 

enjoyment as mediators. 150 students participated in the study. Hierarchical regression 

analysis indicated that independent and collaborative learning styles were associated with 

higher creativity. 

Aydil, Bunyamin (2016) has reported a study on the relationship between 8 th grade 

students’ learning style and their mathematical attitude. Sample of the research consisted of 

100 eight grade students having education in a school in the Central Anatolia. Kolb learning 

style inventory was used for studying learning styles, and an Attitude scale towards 

mathematics was also uses. According to the data obtained it has been noted that attitude 

level to mathematics of 8 th grade students and the learning styles are related. 

Lee, Bokyung and Kim Haedong (2014) have investigated Korean university level 

EFL learners’ learning style preferences. The characteristics of learning style preferences 

and implications for effective English learning were examined through the quantitative 

analysis of 496 subjects’ responses to a learning style survey and their English achievement 

and term end performances. The findings indicated Korean learners’ auditory style 

preferences is noticeable and visual and individual learning styles are also considered to be 

primary learning styles, whereas tactile, kinesthetic, and group learning styles less favoured. 

Bhatti Rahmatullah and Bart William M. (2013) have designed the present study to 

explore the influence of learning styles on scholastic achievement levels. The frequencies of 

the participants falling under the four learning style categories are Convergent – 28, 

Divergent – 49, Assimilator – 76, and Accommodator – 40. The instruments used in the 

study were the Kolb learning style inventory and a demographic form. The major findings 

of the study were that the dominant learning style was Assimilator, and a positive significant 

relationship was found between the learning style assimilator and academic achievement of 

different gender. 




6385

ISSN: 2347-1697 




III. OBJECTIVES 

‣ To find the dominance of the four learning styles possessed by higher secondary 

students in total and in terms of schools background. 

‣ To find the level of leadership potential of higher secondary students in total and in 

terms of schools background. 

‣ To find the significance of difference in learning styles of higher secondary students 

belonging to different schools background. 

‣ To find the significance of difference in leadership potential of higher secondary 

students belonging to different schools background. 

‣ To find the significance of correlation between learning styles and leadership 

potential of higher secondary students in total and in terms of schools background. 

IV. HYPOTHESES 

‣ The subjects of the study are of equal dominance in all the four learning styles. 

‣ The level of leadership potential of higher secondary students in total and in terms of 

schools background is moderate. 

‣ There is no significant difference in learning styles of higher secondary students 

belonging to different schools background. 

‣ There is no significant difference in leadership potential of higher secondary 


‣ There is no significant correlation between learning styles and leadership potential of 

higher secondary students in total and in terms of schools background. 

V. RESEARCH DESIGN 

‣ POPULATION 

Population of the present study comprises all the higher secondary students studying 

in higher secondary schools, located in Trichy educational district. 

‣ SAMPLE 

About 100 students from each type of school – government, aided, and private 

higher secondary schools located in Trichy educational district were chosen randomly to 

form the sample of the study. 

‣ METHOD 

The stated problem generates quantitative data by adopting survey method of 

research, suitable for correlative analysis. 

‣ RESEARCH TOOLS 

The following research tools have been used for data collection. 

Learning Style Inventory: The tool was prepared and validated by the researcher. The 

inventory consists of four sections each one is meant for each one of the following four 

dimensions – Diverger, Assimilator, Converger, and Accommodator. Section one (Diverger) 

consists of 20 items, section two Assimilator consists of 14 items, section three Converger 

comprises 6 items, and the section four Accommodator comprises 9 items. The statements 




6386

ISSN: 2347-1697 




of the inventory were designed on the basis of the findings reported in previous studies on 

the characteristics of the particular learning styles. For each item the respondent has to mark 

tick or cross to show whether the statement is appropriate to him or not. The researcher has 

established content validity, construct validity, and factorial validity. The test of reliability 

has reported 0.82 reliability coefficient. 

Leadership Potential Scale – prepared and standardized by Chandrakumar, P.S. and 

Parthiban, S. (2014). 

‣ STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES 

For testing the hypotheses, Arithmetic Mean, Standard Deviation, ANOVA, Scheffe test, 

Carl Pearson’s Product Moment correlation were used. 

VI. ANALYSIS OFDATA 

Hypothesis 1: The subjects of the study are of equal dominance in all the four learning 

styles. 

Table 1: The subjects of the study are of equal dominance in all the four learning styles 

Category 

N 

Diverger Assimilator Converger Accommodator 

N % N % N % N % 

Government 100 23 23.0 31 31.0* 25 25.0 21 21.0 

Aided 100 30 30.0* 24 24.0 23 23.0 23 23.0 

Private 100 21 21.0 25 25.0 27 27.0* 27 27.0* 

Overall Sample 300 40 13.3 65 21.6 84 28.0 111 37.0* 

* indicates the level of learning style 

Hypothesis 2: The level of leadership potential of higher secondary students in total and in 

terms of schools background is moderate. 

Table 2: Level of leadership potential of higher secondary students in total and in terms of 

schools background 

Variable N 

Low Moderate High 

N % N % N % 

Government 100 27 27.0 41 41.0* 32 32.0 

Aided 100 28 28.0 38 38.0* 34 34.0 

Private 100 25 25.0 31 31.0 44 44.0* 

Overall Sample 300 78 26.0 126 42.0* 96 32.0 

* indicates the level of leadership potential 

Hypothesis 3: There is no significant difference in learning styles of higher secondary 


Table 3: Difference in learning styles of higher secondary students belonging to different 


Calculated 

Dimension School Type Mean 

‘p’ Value 

‘F’ Value 

Government 13.26 

Diverger 

5.62 0.00** 

Aided 16.32** 




6387

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Assimilator 

Converger 

Accommodator 

** significant at 1% level 

Private 12.84 


Aided 12.01 

Private 11.64 


Aided 4.81 

Private 4.69 


Aided 6.26 

Private 7.85** 

2.29 0.12 

1.59 0.29 

4.99 0.00** 

Hypothesis 4: There is no significant difference in leadership potential of higher secondary 


Table 4: Difference in leadership potential of higher secondary students belonging to different 


Calculated 

Variable School Type Mean 

‘p’ Value 

‘F’ Value 


Leadership 

Aided 67.39 1.23 0.45 

Potential 

Private 69.12 

Hypothesis 5: There is no significant correlation between learning styles and leadership 

potential of higher secondary students in total and in terms of schools background. 

Table 5: Correlation between learning styles and leadership potential of higher secondary 

students in total and in terms of schools background 

Dependent 

Calculated ‘p’ 

Variable 1 Variable 2 N 

variable 

‘r’ Value Value 

Diverger 

100 0.21 0.03* 

Government 

Assimilator Leadership 100 0.27 0.00** 

Converger Potential 100 0.22 0.02* 

Accommodator 100 0.34 0.00** 

Diverger 

100 0.39 0.00** 

Aided 

Assimilator Leadership 100 0.23 0.01* 

Converger Potential 100 0.64 0.00** 

Accommodator 100 0.20 0.04* 

Diverger 

100 0.58 0.00** 

Private 

Assimilator Leadership 100 0.22 0.02* 

Converger Potential 100 0.49 0.00** 


Diverger 

300 0.24 0.00** 

Overall Sample 

Assimilator Leadership 300 0.29 0.00** 

Converger Potential 300 0.11 0.02* 


** significant at 1% level *significant at 5% level 




6388

ISSN: 2347-1697 




VII. FINDINGS OF THE STUDY 

The higher secondary students in the schools in Trichy educational district are found to 

be dominant in the learning style – Accommodator with 37% of them falling under this 

category. The higher secondary students in private schools are found to be dominant in 

the learning style Converger (27%) and Accommodator (27%). For the dimensions 

Diverger, the higher secondary students in aided higher secondary schools are found to 

be dominant (30%). On studying the learning style Assimilator, it is found that higher 

secondary students in government schools are found to be dominant (31%). 

The higher secondary students studying in the schools in Trichy educational district are 

found to be moderate in their leadership potential with 42% of them falling under this 

category. The students studying in higher secondary schools run by private management 

are found to be high in their leadership potential (44%). However, the students studying 

in aided and government schools are found to have reported to be moderate. 

Higher secondary students studying in private schools in Trichy educational district are 

found to be significantly higher than their counterparts in aided schools and government 

schools in the learning style Accommodator. The higher secondary students in aided 

schools are found to be higher than those in private and government schools in the 

learning style Diverger. However, no significant difference in observed among the three 

category of institutions with regard to the learning styles Assimilator, and Converger. 

On studying the difference among the higher secondary students of private, aided, and 

government higher secondary schools with regard to leadership potential, no significant 

difference is found. 

On testing the significance of correlation between learning styles and leadership potential 

of higher secondary students in total as well as in terms of types of schools, it is found 

that there exists significant correlation between them in total as well as in terms of types 

of school management. 

VIII. DISCUSSION 

As it was assumed at the beginning of the study that the majority of the higher secondary 

students would seek for concrete experiences to strengthen their basic understanding about 

the varied concepts they are expected to master, it has come out at the end that the 

assumption was valid, as a large percentage of the students have reported to have the 

learning style accommodator. Similarly, the researcher held the assumption in the beginning 

that the students of higher secondary schools would be largely attracted towards 

materializing what they have learnt in practical situations. That is, the higher secondary 

students being at the peak of adolescence naturally be oriented towards experimentation of 

ideas and the theories they have mastered so as to verify the strength of their own thinking 

in both abstract as well as active performing of the same. Since the assumption is true, the 

study has shown that the chosen subjects possess the learning style accommodator 

predominantly. The students of this age group are mostly enthusiastic about investigating 

the world to identify their standing and position with regard to their intellectual, physical, 




6389

ISSN: 2347-1697 




and social competencies. This may be the reason for the subjects of the study to report the 

dominant presence of learning style accommodator. 

True to the finding of the subjects with regard to their learning style, their leadership 

potential is found to be just moderate. The higher secondary students being accommodators 

in their learning style are prone to gaining concrete understanding of facts and figures on the 

basis of concrete experiences. They are also inclined to active experimentation of what they 

have learnt in realistic manner. Therefore, prompted by the style of learning followed by 

their style of acting, they are not at this stage of higher secondary prepared enough to look 

for leadership activities which are more off emotional and social oriented ones. Only after 

crossing the stage of higher secondary level schooling, it seems, it is possible for them to 

come out of the crucial and practical situations in studies and enter into social and emotional 

conditions which call for manifestation of leadership qualities which may satisfy the self by 

serving and leading the fellow beings. 

Moreover, the differential analysis has revealed that in the learning style 

accommodator, the students of private higher secondary schools are at the lead. It may be 

inferred from these that the environment available for private school students is congenial 

enough for practicing the learning style accommodator with the facilities and opportunities 

available for them. Likewise, the higher secondary students of aided schools are reported to 

be higher than private and government school students in the learning style diverger. These 

students also seem to be much oriented towards concrete experiences and nurturing the habit 

of reflective observation making them to be imaginative and capable of giving fruitful 

solutions. It may also be attributed to the prevailing conditions available in such institutions 

which enjoy both governmental assistance and liberal contributions of the management for 

the successful learning of their students. All these outcomes of the study naturally lead to 

the core fact that one to one relationship should exist between these two factors which is 

confirmed again in the present study. 

IX. CONCLUSION 

The researcher would like to conclude by reporting that the present investigation on the two 

psychological characteristics – learning style and leadership potential has brought out new 

findings in respect of higher secondary students which has long been absent in the realm of 

adolescent psychology. The crucial finding with regard to higher secondary students’ 

learning style - accommodator is capable of explaining the general nature of higher 

secondary students who are capable of bursting out of silent activity and emerging into a 

more challenging and novel field of involvement, hither to not expected of them even by 

their own family members, soon after the completion of their course of study. 

X. REFERENCES 

[1] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/learning styles 

[2] http://www.vark-learn.com/english/page.asp?p=helpsheets 

[3] 3.http://www.clinteach.com.au/assets/LEARNING-STYLES-Kolb-QUESTIONNAIRE.pdf 

[4] http://www.learning-styles-nline.com/overview/ 




6390

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[5] http://www.mindtools.com/mnemisty.html#sthash.yu5roe9p.dpuf. 

[6] Aydin, Bunyamin (2016). Examination of the relationship between eighth grade students' 

learning styles and attitudes towards mathematics, Journal of Education and Training 

Studies, Vol. 4, No. 2, Feb 2016. 

[7] Bhatti Rahmatullah and Bart William M. (2013). On the effect of learning style on 

scholastic achievement, Current Issues in Education, Vol. 16, No. 2, Aug 2013. 

[8] Brunton, Bruce (2015). Learning styles and student performance in introductory economics, 

Journal of Education for Business, Vol. 90, No. 2, 2015. 

[9] Lee, Bokyung and Kim Haedong (2014). What can we learn from our learners' learning 

styles?, English Language Teaching, Vol. 7, No. 9, 2014. 

[10] Sitar, Alesa Sasa, et al (2011). Individual learning styles and creativity, Creativity Research 

Journal, Vol. 28, No. 3, 2016. 


Portia, R. (2017) :: “Establishing the Relationship Between Learning Style and 

Leadership Potential of Higher Secondary Students of Different School 

Background” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 





6391

www.ijifr.com 



To Study the Effectiveness of Homoeopathic 

Medicines in Allergic Rhinitis 

Paper ID IJIFR/V4/ E5/ 065 Page No. 6392-6397 Subject Area Homoeopathy 

Key Words 

Allergy, Rhinitis, Homoeopathic Medicines, Miasms, Outcome 

Dr. Siva Rami Reddy. E 

PhD Scholar, 

Sri Ganganagar Homoeopathic Medical College, 

Hospital and Research Center, 

Sri Ganganagar, Rajasthan, India 

Abstract 

Studies using Homoepathy have reported beneficial effects from treating 

allergy rhinitis. Rhinitis is inflammation of the nasal mucosa and includes 

common symptoms like nasal discharge, itching, sneezing, nasal blockage 

or congestion. This article review evidence from controlled trials for the use 

of homoepathy in allergic rhinitis. Allergic rhinitis is a global health 

problem that is often treated with homoepathy. The objective of this review 

will be to evaluate the effectiveness of homoepathic medicines in allergic 

rhinitis. The clinical study was undertaken with on aim to prove the efficacy 

of Homoeopathic medicines in cases of allergic rhinitis at Sri Ganganagar 

homoeopathic medical college and Hospital. All indicated homoeopathic 

medicines on the base of totality of symptoms which prove beneficial for all 

the case and thus the effectiveness of homoepathic medicines was proved in 

the treatment of Allergic Rhinitis. 


Rhinitis is described as inflammation of the nasal mucosa and includes common symptoms 

like sneezing, obstruction of the nasal passage, conjunctive, nasal and pharyngeal itching 

and lacrymation. All symptoms occurring in a temporal relationship to allergen exposure. 

Although commonly seasonal due to elicitation by airborne pollens, it can be perennial in an 

environment of chronic expoure 1 . About 10% of the population suffers from allergies to 

extrinsic allergens such as animal dander, mites, house dust, moulds, yeast and pollen 2 . 

Which manifest nasal and ocular symptoms that occur as a result of the development of an 

inflammatory hypersensitivity reaction to aeroallergens deposited on the nasal mucosa and 

conjunctiva 3 ? Allergic rhinitis is a global health problem, and is increasing in prevalence 4 . 

Prevalence estimate ranges from as low as 4 percent to more than 40 percent 5 . There are 

. 



6392

ISSN: 2347-1697 




three types of rhinitis commonly seen in clinical practice: allergic, non allergic and 

infective. Mixed forms also occur 6 . The onset of allergenic rhinitis appears to be highest in 

the school going children usually before five years of age. Studies conducted in school 

going children’s indicate an incidence of 27.5% in 1999 in the age group of six to fifteen 

years 7 . Aetiology of allergic rhinitis is environmental, heredity, inhalants, ingestant, 

contactans, drugs, infections, intestinal helminthes and tissue proteins in body fluids 8 . 

Allergic rhinitis is an immunoglobin E mediated immunologic response of the nasal 

mucosa to airborne allergens such as pollens or allergens in individuals with a sensitized 

immune system produces degranulation of mast cells with the release of chemical 

mediators. Thee mediators are responsible for the symptoms of allergic rhinitis. Allergic 

rhinitis is clinically defined by the presence of sneezing, obstruction of the nasal passage, 

conjunctives, nasal and pharyngeal itching and lacrymation which are reversible 

spontaneously or with treatment 9 . Allergic rhinitis affects quality of life, performance and 

attendance at school 10 and work. It has significant impact on health care costs 11 . 

Allergic rhinitis is also a global health problem, affecting five hundred million patients 

worldwide 12 . The prevention of perennial rhinitis consists of avoiding as far as possible; 

exposure to any identifiable etiological factor but this is often diffcult 13 . People with allergic 

rhinitis may be at higher risk for other allergic including potentially serious food or latex 

allergies 14 .The result of struggle can be seen primarily up on the mental, emotional or 

physical level, depending up on the over all state of health at t he moment of the stress 15 . 

Susceptibility is an inherent capacity in all living thing to react to stimuli in the environment 

and represent a fundamental quality that distinguishes the living from the non living 16 . 

According to H.A. Robert ‘we may define susceptibility primarily as the reaction of the 

organism to external and internal influences’ 17 . 

II. MATERIALS AND METHODOLOGY 

This study was conducted on the patients who attended the Out Patient department of Sri 

ganganagar Homoeopathic Medical College, Hospital and Research Center, Sri ganganagar 

and the study was undertaken for a period of six months. Detailed case was taken, analysis 

and evaluation following Homoeopathic principles was done 18 .The potency was selected on 

the basis of individual susceptibility. 

The outcomes were an improvement of symptoms recorded in monthly basis 

individual symptoms which includes any appropriate measures of nasal discharge, itching, 

sneezing and nasal congestion. A number of subgroups, homoeopathic potency, age group, 

and types of tonsillitis (Acute and Chronic) were analyzed. 

Statistical Analysis: Data were presented as proportion and percentage and difference in 

proportion were analyzed by using T test. 

III. RESULT 

30 Allergic Rhinitis patients with mean ± SD, maximum cases were observed in age group ( 

0 to 15 years). 

Dr. Siva Rami Reddy. E :: To Study the Effectiveness of 

Homoeopathic Medicines in Allergic Rhinitis 

6393

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Table 1: Distribution Of Allergic Rhinitis To Age Group 

Age Group No. of Cases Percentage (%) 

0 – 5 6 20.00% 

5 – 10 16 53.33% 

10 – 15 8 26.66% 

Total 30 100% 

Among 30 Allergic Rhinitis patients with mean ± SD, maximum cases were observed in age 

group of 0 – 5 years in 6 (20%) cases, 5 – 10 years in 16 (53.33%) cases, 10 – 15 years of 

age group had 8 (26.66%) cases. 

Table 2: Distribution Of Allergic Rhinitis According To Sex 

No. of Cases Percentage (%) 

Male 13 43.33% 

Female 17 56.66% 

Total 30 100% 

Patients were in the male 13 (43.33%) and 17 (56.66%) patients were females. Out of 30 

cases 17 (56.66%) were females and 13 (43.33%) were males. In the age group 0 – 5 years 2 

cases (6.66%) males, and 4 cases (13.33%) females. In the group 5 – 10 years, 8 cases 

(26.66%) males, 8 cases (26.66%) females and in the age group 10 – 15 there were 3 cases 

(10%) males, and cases (16.66%). 

Out of randomly selected cases 14 (46.66%) cases suffering for 0 to 1 year, 6(20%) 

cases suffering for 1 to 2 years. 7 (23.33%) cases were suffering for 2 to 3 years, 3 (10%) 

cases suffering for 3 to 4 years. In the research of Homoeopathic medicines in the treatment 

of rhinitis 10 medicines were prescribed to the patients according to the symptoms similarity 

and the following observations were made. 

Table 3: Distribution of Drugs Used In Treatment Of Allergic Rhinitis 

Drugs 

No. of Cases Percentage% 

Arsenicum Album 6 20.00% 

Sabadilla 5 16.6%6 

Allium Cepa 4 13.33% 

Baryta Carbonica 3 10.00% 

Pulsatilla Pratensis 3 10.00% 

Calcarea Carbonica 3 10.00% 

Sulphur 2 6.66% 

Lycopodium Clavatum 2 6.66% 

Baryta Iodata 1 3.33% 

Natrium Muriaticum 1 3.33% 

Total 30 100% 

Arsenicum Album is the most effective medicine out of the total ten Homoeopathic 

medicines chosen for the study. Arsenicum Album cured 3 patients and 3 got improvement 

hence it can be concluded that Arsenicum Album is more effective. During the study it was 

found that the next effective medicine for the treatment of Rhinitis is Sabadilla 1 cases got 



6394

ISSN: 2347-1697 




cured, 3 cases got improved, 1 patient not improved. Alliun cepa 1 case got cured, 3 cases 

improved, Baryta carbonica 2 cases cured, 1 case improved. Pulsatilla Pratensis 1 case 

cured, 1 case improved and 1 case not improved. Clacarea Carbonica 1 case cured, 2 cases 

improved. Sulphur 2 cases improved. Lycopodium Clavatum 1 case cured and 1 case 

improved. Baryta Iodata 1 case cured. Natrium Muriaticum 1 case cured. 

IV. DISCUSSION 

Among 30 Allergic Rhinitis patients with mean ± SD, maximum cases were observed in age 

group of 0 – 5 years in 6 (20%) cases, 5 – 10 years in 16 (53.33%) cases, 10 – 15 years of 

age group had 8 (26.66%) cases. Patients were in the male 13 (43.33%) and 17 (56.66%) 

patients were females. Out of 30 cases 17 (56.66%) were females and 13 (43.33%) were 

males. In the age group 0 – 5 years 2 cases (6.66%) males, and 4 cases (13.33%) females. In 

the group 5 – 10 years, 8 cases (26.66%) males, 8 cases (26.66%) females and in the age 

group 10 – 15 there were 3 cases (10%) males, and cases (16.66%). 

Out of randomly selected cases 14 (46.66%) cases suffering for 0 to 1 year, 6(20%) 

cases suffering for 1 to 2 years. 7 (23.33%) cases were suffering for 2 to 3 years, 3 (10%) 

cases suffering for 3 to 4 years.This study reflects the predominance of Psoric Miasm in the 

cases of Allergic Rhinitis. Out of 30 cases as a Fundamental miasms Psoric expression was 

seen in 14 (46.67%) cases, Sycotic expression was seen in 13 (43.33%) cases, Tubercular 

expression was seen in 1 case (3.33%), and syphilitic expression was seen in 2 (6.67%) 

cases. Out of 30 cases Dominant Miasm Psoric expression was seen in 10 (33.33%) cases, 

Sycotic expression was seen in 13 (43.33%) cases, and Tubercular expression was seen in 7 

(23.33%) cases. 

In the research of Homoeopathic medicines in the treatment of rhinitis 10 medicines 

were prescribed to the patients according to the symptoms similarity and the following 

observations were made. All indicated homoeopathic medicines on the base of totality of 

symptoms which prove beneficial for all the case and thus the effectiveness of homoepathic 

medicines was proved in the treatment of allergic rhinitis. Arsenicum Album is the most 

effective medicine out of the total ten Homoeopathic medicines chosen for the study. 

Arsenicum Album cured 3 patients and 3 got improvement hence it can be concluded that 

Arsenicum Album is more effective. During the study it was found that the next effective 

medicine for the treatment of Rhinits is Sabadilla 1 cases got cured, 3 cases got improved, 1 

patients not improved. Alliun cepa 1 case got cured, 3 cases improved, Baryta carbonica 2 

cases cured, 1 case improved. Pulsatilla Pratensis 1 case cured, 1 case improved and 1 case 

not improved. Clacarea Carbonica 1 case cured, 2 cases improved. Sulphur 2 cases 

improved. Lycopodium Clavatum 1 case cured and 1 case improved. Baryta Iodata 1 case 

cured. Natrium Muriaticum 1 case cured. 

The overall response of the treatment with the help 10 homoepathic medicines. It 

was observed that out of 30 patient, 18 (60%) patients were cured, 10 (33%) patients had 

improvement, 2 (7%) patients showed no response, 30 patients, 18 (60%) patient were 

cured, 10 (33%) patients improved, 2 (7%) patients showed no response. 



6395

ISSN: 2347-1697 




V. CONCLUSION 

The research shows that Homoeopathic medicines play an important role in the treatment of 

allergic rhinitis. The study depicts that 60% of patients got relief from the Homoeopathy 

medicines and this is not a small number. The most effective remedies during the study were 

Aresenicum album, sabadilla, allium Cepa, Baryta Carbonica, Pulsatilla Pratensis, Calcarea 

Carbonica, Lycopodium Clavatum, Baryta Iodata, Natrium Muriaticum. There were no side 

effective during the treatment and it can be concluded that homoeopathic medicines can be 

help the patient to take a new lease on life. 

During the study it was observed that in almost all the cases the homoeopathic 

medicines responded well and the patient not only got rid of the main complaints of rhinitis 

but also got rid of the associated complaints with restoration of health. With the help of use 

of homoeopathic medicines even surgical intervention was avoided. Thus we can conclude 

that Homoeopathic medicines used with holistic approach are very effective in treating the 

cases of recurrent Allergic Rhinitis. 


[1] Fauci Anthony S, Kasper Dennis L, Longo Dan L, Braunwald Eugene, Hauser Stephen L, 

Jameson J Larry, Harrisons principles of Internal Medicine. 17 th ed. USA: The Mc Graw Hill 

Companies: 2008.p.2068.Vol – 2. 

[2] Burton Martin, Leighton Susanna, Robson Andrew, Russell John. Hall and colmans 

Diseasesof the ENT. 15 th ed. Edinburgh: Harcourt Pub. Limited: 2000.p.103. 

[3] Goldman Lee, Ausiello Dennis, Cecil Medicine. 23 rd ed. New Delhi. Elsevier, a division of 

Reed Elsevier India Private Limited, 2008.p.1937. Vol-2. 

[4] Gleeson Michael, browning George G, Burtin Martin J, Hibbert John, Scott Browns 

otorhinolaryngology, Head and neck surgery. 7 th ed. Kirby street, Londan: Edwar Arnold 

(publishers) ltd: 2008.p.1388-92.Vol-2. 

[5] www.ingentaconnect.com/content/ocean/aap. 

[6] Angier E, willington J, Scadding G, Homes S, Walker S, Management of allergic and non 

allergic rhinitis; a primary care summary of the BSACI guideline. Prim Care Respir J 2010, 

19:217-222. 

[7] Parthasarathy A, IAP text book of paediatrics.3 rd ed. New Delhi: Jaypee Brothers Medical 

Publishers (P) Ltd:2006.p.860. 

[8] Hathiram Bachi T, Grewal D.S, ENT simplified. 1 st ed. Mumbai: Bhalani Book 

Depot:1999.p.191. 

[9] Bousquet J, Khaltaev N, Cruz AA, Denburg J, Togias A, Zuberibier T, Baena Cagnani CE, 

Canonica GW, Van Weel C, Agache I, Ait khaled N, Bachert C, Blaiss MS, Bonini S, 

BouletLP, Bousquet PJ< Camargos P,: allergic Rhinits and its impact on Asthma 2008 updte. 

Allergy 2008,63:8-160. 

[10] Walker S, Khan wasti S, Fletcher M, Cullinan P, Harris J, Sheikh A: seasonal allergic rhinitis 

is associated with a determimental effect on examination performance in U.K. teenagers:case 

contral study.J Allergy Clin Immunol 2007;120:381-387. 

[11] Malone DC, Lawson KA, Smit DH, Michael Arrighi H: A cost of illness study of allergic 

rhinitis in the United State. J Allergy Clin Immunol 1997:99:22 – 27. 

[12] Brozek JL, Bousquet J, Casale TB: Allergic Rhinits and its Impact on Asthma (ARIA) 

guidelines:2010 Revision. J Allergy Clin Immunol 2010:126:466 – 476. 

[13] Boon Nicholas A, Colledge Nicki R, Walker Brian R, Hunter John A.A. Davidsons principal 

and practice of Medicine. 20 th ed. USA: Publication Elsevier Limited:2006.p.729. 

[14] www.healthcentral.com/allegery/understanding-allergy-000077_5145.html. 



6396

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[15] Vitholkas George, The science of Homoepathy. 1 st ed. New Delhi: B Jain publishers: 

1997.p.21,14,13. 

[16] Dhawale M.L, Principles and Practice of Homoepathy. 3 rd ed. Mumbai: I.C.R. 

Publications:2000.p.245,253. Vol-1. 

[17] Roberts Herbert A, The Principles and Art of Cure by Homoeopathy. Reprint ed. New Delhi: 

B Jain Publishers; 1999. P. 150. 

[18] Hahnemann Dr.S.C.F, The Chronic Miasm Psora and Psedopsora, B. Jain Publisher(P) Ltd., 

New Delhi:1999.p.14. 


Reddy E, S. R. (2017) :: “To Study the Effectiveness of Homoeopathic Medicines in 

Allergic Rhinitis” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 




6397

www.ijifr.com 



Chitosan from Shrimp Bio-Waste: Potential 


Paper ID IJIFR/V4/ E5/ 067 Page No. 6398-6403 Subject Area Biotechnology 

Key Words 

Chitosan, Chitin, Marine Sources, Antibacterial Activity 

1 st Vinusha Bellamkonda 

2 nd Vidya Sagar Reddy Gundarapu 

3 rd Vijaya Chalamacherla 

Research Scholars, 

Department of Biotechnology, 

Vikrama Simhapuri University, 

Nellore, Andhra Pradesh, India 


Department of Marine Biology, 

Vikrama Simhapuri University, 

Nellore, Andhra Pradesh, India 

Abstract 

Chitosan is a polysaccharide biopolymer derived primarily from crustacean 

waste, currently received considerable attention due to its biocompatibility 

and nontoxic nature. The present study is aimed to extract chitosan from 

Marine sources like shells of shrimp, crab and fish scales and to investigate 

its antimicrobial properties against important Gram positive and negative 

pathogenic Bacteria. Chitosan was obtained from shell waste sequentially 

by deproteinisation, demineralisation, decolourization and deacetylation 

processes. The amount of Chitosan extracted from Crab shell, Shrimp shell 

and Fish scales was 79%, 47.08% and 24.03%, respectively. The isolated 

chitosan showed antibacterial activity against all the 7 organisms tested 

(Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas fluroscence, Klebsialla pneumoniae, Bacillus 

substilis, Bacillus megaterium Staphylococcus aureus and Proteus vulgaris). 

of the three sources tested Chitosan obtained from shrimp waste showed 

high antibacterial activity when compared to Chitosan from crab and Fish 

scales. The results of the present study provide the base-line information for 

the utilization of chitosan in the development of antimicrobials in pharma 

and food industries. 


The shellfish processing industry in India generates 125,000 to 150,000 tons of shell waste 

per year (Ramyadevi, 2012). About 35-45% by weight of crustacean shell raw material is 

. 



6398

ISSN: 2347-1697 




discarded as waste when processed into headless shell-on products. These shells are major 

wastes of seafood industries and they tend to cause unpleasant odours and environmental 

pollution if not adequately processed (Al-Sagheer , 2009). Crustacean shell wastes mainly 

consists of 30–40 % protein, 30–50 % calcium carbonate, and 20–30 % chitin, etc., which 

could be used to produce high value added materials if recycled (Nouri , 2015). 

Chitosan, deacetylated product of chitin is a nontoxic biopolymer (Abdulkarim , 

2013) and it is commercially produced from the crustacean shell wastes through different 

degrees of deacetylation, which attribute to a variety of properties (Rinaudo, 2006). Due to 

its excellent biological characteristics, including biocompatibility, biodegradability, and low 

toxicity, over the past few years, chitosan has gained multiple applications ranging from 

pharmaceutical, cosmetic, medical, food and agricultural field (Szymanska, 2015). It has 

several advantages over other types of natural antimicrobials, such as higher antimicrobial 

activity, broader spectrum of activity, higher killing rate and lower toxicity toward 

mammalian cells (Rabea, 2003). In this context, the present study aimed to extract Chitin 

from marine sources. The obtained chitin was transformed into the more useful chitosan and 

evaluated the antibacterial activity against important Gram positive and negative pathogenic 

bacteria. 

II. METHODOLOGY 

2.1.Extraction of Chitin 

Chitin and chitosan were prepared from shell waste according to the method suggested by 

Kumari, 2014.The shell waste (crab, shrimp and fish scales) was obtained from nearby 

processing industries and initially subjected to shade drying for 2 days and then placed in 

hot air oven at 60 0 c for 24 hours. The shell waste (100g) was treated with 4% NaOH 

(100ml) at room temperature for 24hours for deprotenation. The deproteinized shells were 

then treated with 4% HCl (100ml) at room temperature for 12hours for demineralization to 

yield chitin 

2.2. Extraction of Chitosan from Chitin 

Chitosan was obtained from extracted chitin through deacetylation method (Kumari, 2014). 

The extracted chitin was dissolved in 50% NaOH (100ml) at 60°C for 8h to obtain crude 

chitosan. After filtration, the residue was obtained, washed three times with hot distilled 

water at 60°C. The crude chitosan was obtained by drying in a hot air oven at 50°C 

overnight. Then 10% acetic acid was added to the residue and stored for 12 hours at room 

temperature. The dissolved sample was reprecipitated by adding 40% NaOH. The residue 

was removed by filtration, then two fold volumes of ethanol was added to the filtrate. The 

crystal of water-soluble chitosan was liberated after incubation at ambient conditions 

overnight and dried in oven at 50°C. 

2.3. Assay of Antibacterial Activity of Chitosan: 

Antibacterial assay was carried out by disc diffusion technique (Bauer,1966). A 24 hours 

old culture of test organisms (0.5ml) was applied on to sterile nutrient agar plates to prepare 

Vinusha Bellamkonda, Vidya Sagar Reddy Gundarapu, Vijaya 

Chalamacherla :: Chitosan from Shrimp Bio-Waste: Potential 


6399

ISSN: 2347-1697 




a lawn culture. The test organisms used in the study were Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas 

fluroscence, Klebsialla pneumoniae, Bacillus substilis, Bacillus megaterium Staphylococcus 

aureus and Proteus vulgaris. The sterile Whatmann No 1 filter paper discs were soaked in 

chitosan solution (500mg/100ml) obtained from different sources i.e shells of shrimp, crab 

and fish scales. Streptomycin (10µg) was used as positive control. 

III. RESULTS 

3.1 Extraction Of Chitin And Water Soluble Chitosan Soluble Chitosan 

The yield of chitin from shrimp, crab shell waste and fish scales were 45%, 70%, 20% 

respectively and the yield of chitosan from shrimp, crab shell waste, and fish scales were 

47.08%, 79% and 24.03%, respectively (figure:1). In this study highest amount of chitin and 

chitosan was extracted from crab shells. 

A B C 

D E F 

Plate A & B:Extracted Chitin and Chitosan from Fish scales 

Plate C & D: Extracted Chitin and Chitosan from Crab Shell 

Plate E & F:Extracted Chitin and Chitosan from Shrimp shell 

100% 

80% 

70% 

79% 

60% 

40% 

20% 

45% 

47.80% 

20% 

24.03% 

chitin 

chitosan 

0% 

Shrimp shell Crab shell Fish scales 

Figure 1: Yeild of Chitin and Chitosan from different sources 




6400

ISSN: 2347-1697 




3.2.Assay of Antibacterial Activity:: 

Antibacterial activity of chitosan extracted from different sources was tested against 7 

pathogenic bacterial strains and the results obtained were presented in Figure-2. All isolates 

shows sensitivity against Chitosan. The chitosan from the 3 different sources showed 

antibacterial activity against all pathogenic bacteria tested. However, chitosan obtained from 

Shrimp showed highest antibacterial activity when compared to Crab and Fish. Among all 

the test organisms, Klebsiella pneumoniac showed highest susceptibility (2.6mm inhibition 

zone) towards chotosan from shrimp. When compared to positive control (Streptomycin) 

chitosan obtained from all sources showed 10% more activity against all pathogenic bacteria 

tested. 

1 

1 

1 1 

4 

2 

2 

4 2 

4 

4 

3 3 3 3 

A B C D 

2 

1 1 

1 

4 

2 

2 

4 

2 

4 

3 

3 3 

E F G 

Figure-2: Assay of antibacterial activity of chitosan against tested organisms-Zones of 

Inhibition (mm). 

Plates: A. Escherichia coli, B. Bacillus megaterium, C. Bacillus subtilis, D. Klebsiella 

pneumonia E. Pseudomonas fluorescence. F. Proteus vulgar, G. Staphylococcus aureus. 

Wells 1-shrimp chitosan, 2-crab chitosan, 3-fish chitosan, 4-positive control (streptomycin) 

3 

2.5 

2 

1.5 

1 

0.5 

0 

Fish 

Crab 

Shrimp 

Streptomycin 

Figure 3 : Assay of antibacterial activity of chitosan-Zones of Inhibition (mm) 




6401

ISSN: 2347-1697 





Chitosan has been extracted from marine sources of by-products which form cheap and 

abundant functional raw materials. According to studies and analyses of different 

crustaceans shells (shrimp, crab, and fish scales), there was great variability of this 

composition where chitosan amounts were varied of approximately for shrimp (47%), crab 

(79%) and fish scales (29%) . This study has also been conducted to assess inhibitory 

effects of chitosan in terms of zone of inhibition. Chitosan obtained from shrimp showed 

significant antibacterial activity than crab and fish. Chitosan would have advantages as new 

antibacterial agents due to their higher activity and since they are also more readily soluble 

in water than the native polysaccharides. 

V. REFERENCES 

[1] A.Abdulkarim, M.T.Isa, S.Abdulsalam, A.J.Muhammad &A.O. Ameh,” Extraction and 

Characterization of Chitin and Chitosan from Mussel Shell”, Civil and Environmental 

Research, 3(2), 108-114 (2013). 

[2] Abdul Karim Shah, Zeenat M. Ali, Abdul Rehman Memon, A. JabbarLaghari, Moina Akhtar 

Mughal, Syed Farman Ali Shah, Hussain Saleem, “Exploitation of Low Cost Coal Fly Ash 

Adsorbent with Coagulants for the Treatment of Industrial Complex Nature Dyes Wastewater”, 

IJSER Vol. 4, Issue 9, pp 109-119 (2013). 

[3] A.Domard, M.Rinadudo,”Preparation and characterization of fully deacetylatedchitosan”,I J 

BiolMacromol. 5: 49-52,(1983). 

[4] A.Einbu, K.M. Vårum,(2008) “Characterization of chitin and its hydrolysis to GlcNAc and 

GlcN”, Biomacromolecules, 9:1870–1875 (2008). 

[5] A.W.Bauer, W.M.Kirby, .J.CCherris and M. Truck,”Antibiotic susceptibility testing by a 

standardized single disk method”, The American Journal of Clinical Pathology,45, No 4, 493– 

496(1966). 

[6] B.Jung, C.Kim, K.Choi, YM.Lee, J.Kim, “Preparation of amphiphilic chitosan and `their 

antimicrobial activities”,J. Appl. Polym. Sci, 72:1713-1719 (1999). 

[7] B.Moerschbacher, El. Gueddari, “Bio-activity matrices for partially acetylated chitosan 

oligomers”, Advances in Chitin Science,Vol IX (CD): 10-23 (2007). 

[8] C. Rejane Goy, T.B.Sinara, Morais, B.G.Odilio and Assis,” Evaluation of the antimicrobial 

activity of chitosan and its quaternized derivative on E. coli and S. aureus growth”,Revista 

Brasileira de Farmacognosia.,Volume 26, Issue 1,pages 122-127(2016). 

[9] E.S.Abdou, K.S.A.Nagy, &M.Z.Elsabee,” Extraction and characterization of chitin and 

chitosan from local sources”, Bioresource Technology, 99:1359−1367 (2008). 

[10] E.Szymanska &K. Winnicka, “Stability of Chitosan – A Challenge for Pharmaceutical and 

Biomedical Application”, Marine Drugs, 13, 1819-1864(2015). 

[11] ET.Dunn, EW.Grandmaison, MFA.Goosen, “Applications and Properties of Chitosan”, J 

BioactCompatPolym, 7: 370- 97(1992). 

[12] F.A.Al-Sagheer, M.A. Al-Sughayer, S.Muslim &M.Z Elsabee, “Extraction and 

Characterization of Chitin and Chitosan from Marine Sources in Arabian Gulf”, Carbohydrate 

Polymers, 77,410-419 (2009). 

[13] G. Crini , P.M. Badot,” Application of chitosan, a natural aminopolysaccharide, for dye 

removal from aqueous solutions by adsorption processes using batch studies: A review of 

recent literature”,Progr. Polym. Sci, 33:399–447 (2008). 

[14] Han-Fen Huang,Chien-Fang Peng,“Antibacterial and antifungal activity of alkylsulfonated 

chitosan”, Biomarkers and Genomic Medicine Volume 7, Issue 2, Pages 83–86. 




6402

ISSN: 2347-1697 




[15] I.Batista, GAF. Roberts, “A novel facile technique for deacetylating chitin” Makromol 

Chem,191: 435-43(1990). 

[16] K.Kurita “Chitin and chitosan functional biopolymer from marine crustaceans”, Mar 

Biotechnol,8: 203-26 (2006). 

[17] M.Nouri, F.Khodaiyan, S.H.Razavi &M. Mousavi, “Improvement of Chitosan Production from 

Persian Gulf Shrimp Waste by Response Surface Technology”, Food Hydrocolloids, 3, 1-9 

(2015). 

[18] M. Rinaudo, “Chitin and Chitosan: Properties and Applications”, Progress Polymer Science, 

31, 603-632 (2006). 

[19] M.E.Rabea, C.V Badawy, G.Stevens, W. Smagghe and Steurbaut,” Chitosan as antimicrobial 

agent: applications and mode of action”, Biomacromolecules, 4, pp 1457–1465 (2003). 

[20] ML.Bade,”Structure and isolation of native animal chitins. In: Goosen MFA, Ed. Applications 

of chitin and chitosan”, Lancaster: Technomic Publishing. 253-77 (1997). 

[21] N.Acosta, C. Jimenez, V.Borau and A. Heras,”Extraction and characterization of chitin from 

crustaceans”, Biomass Bioenerg, 5(2): 145-53 (1993). 

[22] R.A.Muzzarelli, R.Rochetti,”Determination of the degree of deacetylationof chitosan by first 

derivative ultraviolet spectrophotometry”, Journal of CarbohydrPolym. 5:461-72(1985). 

[23] S.Kumari& P.K Rath, “Extraction and Characterization of Chitin and Chitosan from (Labeo 

Rohit) Fish Scales”, Procedia Material Science, 6, 482-489 (2014). 

[24] R.Minke, J.Blackwell.“The structure of α – chitin”, Journal of Molecular Biology,120: 167 – 

181 (1978). 


Vinusha, B. , Gundarapu,V.S.R. , Chalamacherla, V. (2017) :: “Chitosan from 

Shrimp Bio-Waste: Potential Antibacterial Agent” International Journal of 

Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 2347-1697), Vol. 4 No. (5), January 2017, 

pp. 6398-6403, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/067 




6403

www.ijifr.com 



Data Mining Techniques for Fraud 

Detection in Health Insurance 


Key Words 

Computer 

Engineering 

Data Mining, Health Insurance Fraud, Supervised, Unsupervised, Clustering, 

Geo-Location Information 

1 st Pranali Pawar 

2 nd Namrata Ghuse 

M.tech. Student, 




Professor, 




Abstract 

An effective method of data mining for health insurance fraud detection that 

identifies suspicious behaviour of health care providers. Fraud and abuse on 

medical claims became a major concern for health insurance companies last 

decades. Estimates made for the studied U.S. Medicaid health insurance 

program is that up to 10% of the claims are fraudulent. Fraud involves 

intentional deception or misrepresentation intended to result in an 

unauthorized benefit. It is shocking because the incidence of health 

insurance fraud keeps increasing every year. Nowadays there is huge 

amount of data stored in real world databases and this amount continues to 

grow fast. So, there is a need for semi-automatic methods that discover the 

hidden knowledge in such database. Data mining automatically filtering 

through immense amounts of data to find known/unknown patterns bring 

out valuable new perceptions and make predictions. Data mining which is 

divided in to two learning techniques viz., supervised and unsupervised is 

employed to detect fraudulent claims. Basically these techniques are used 

for fraud detection in health insurance. 


Health care fraud and abuse losses represent tens of billions of dollars each year in many 

countries. Medical fraud can occur at various levels. According to, fraud and corruption in 

. 



6404

ISSN: 2347-1697 




health care industry can be grouped in illicit activities associated to affiliates, medical 

professionals, staff and manager and suppliers. Although fraud may not necessarily lead to 

direct legal consequences, it can become a critical problem for the business if it is very 

prevalent and if the prevention procedures are not failsafe. There is a difference between 

fraud prevention and detection. Fraud prevention describes measures to avoid fraud to occur 

in the first place. In contrast, fraud detection involves identifying fraud as quickly as 

possible once it has been committed. According to the National Health Care Anti-Fraud 

Association, healthcare fraud is an intentional deception or misrepresentation made by a 

person, or an entity that could result in some unauthorized benefit to him or his accomplices. 

Health care abuse is produced when either the provider practices are inconsistent with sound 

scale, business or medical practices and result in an unnecessary cost or in reimbursement of 

services that are not medically necessary or that fail to meet professionally recognized 

standards for health care. In order to assure the healthy operation of a healthcare insurance 

system, fraud and abuse detection mechanisms are imperative, but highly specialized 

domain knowledge is required. Furthermore, well-designed detection policies, able to adapt 

to new trends acting simultaneously as prevention measures, have to be considered. 

Data mining part of an iterative process is called knowledge discovery in databases (KDD) 

can assist to extract this knowledge automatically? It has allowed better direction and use of 

health care fraud detection and investigative resources by recognizing and quantifying the 

underlying attributes of fraudulent claims, fraudulent providers, and fraudulent beneficiaries. 

Automatic fraud detection helps to reduce the manual parts of a fraud screening/checking 

process becoming one of the most established industry/government data mining 

applications. In several countries fraudulent and abusive behavior in health insurance is a 

major problem. Fraud in medical insurance covers a wide range of activities in terms of cost 

and sophistication. Health insurance systems are either sponsored by governments or 

managed by the private sector, to share the health care costs in those countries. The 

ISAPREs system, modelled closely on US HMOs (Health Maintenance Organization), 

wascreatedin1981with the objective of giving the consumer more choices through a 

competitive health insurance system and by expanding private provision of health services. 

Affiliates of private health insurance companies may pay an additional contribution for a 

specific health plan. The fee determines the level of coverage and a limit over the health 

care expenses are defined for each plan. In 1990, the government established a public 

institution called Superintendence of ISAPREs to regulate the private health insurance 

market. It mediates between consumers and the ISAPREs, regulates the market in order to 

guarantee all contracts, and provides information to the public to increase the members’ 

knowledge and market transparency. 

Supervised techniques (classification) cannot classify new types of disease claims whereas 

unsupervised techniques (clustering) cannot detect duplicate claims i.e. fraud. So, a novel 

hybrid approach for health insurance fraud detection is proposed. The drawbacks of 

supervised and unsupervised techniques are explained with the help of examples below. 

Raw data for health care fraud detection come mostly from insurance carriers (this also 

Pranali Pawar, Namrata Ghuse :: Data Mining Techniques for 

Fraud Detection in Health Insurance 

6405

ISSN: 2347-1697 




partly explains why little research exists to detect insurance carriers’ fraud), including 

governmental health departments and private insurance companies. Major governmental 

health departments that have been reported in the literature include the Bureau of National 

Health Insurance (NHI) in Taiwan. 

Consider there are two claims made by the same patient, out of which one is the original 

claim and the other one is a duplicate claim as shown in Fig. 1. Duplicate claim is formed by 

changing the date but keeping rest of the patient’s details same. 

Figure 1: Original and duplicate claims made by the same patient 

In Fig. 2, both the claims (original and duplicate) get classified into their respective classes 

based on the training given to the SVM. Here, the duplicate claim gets classified into the 

fraudulent class and hence gets detected. 

Figure 2: Classifying the claims 

II. SURVEY REVIEW 

1. Phua et. al. highlights fraud committed in insurance industry as one of the most studied 

in terms of the number of data mining-based fraud detection publications, existing four 

sub-groups of insurance fraud detection: home, crop, automobile and medical 

insurances. In an on-line discounting learning algorithm to indicate whether a case has a 

high possibility of being a statistical outlier in data mining applications such as fraud 

detection is used for identifying meaningful rare cases in health insurance pathology 

data from Australia’s Health Insurance Commission (HIC). 

2. Becker et. al. identify the effects of fraud control expenditures and hospital and patient 

characteristics on up coding, treatment intensity and health outcomes in the Medicare 

and Medicaid programs. Cox applied a fraud detection system based on fuzzy logic for 

analyzing health care provider claims. This fuzzy system uses rules derived from human 

experts for detecting anomalous behavior patterns. Tasks performed in support of a data 

mining project for HCFA (Health Care Financing Administration) such as customer 

discussions, data extraction and cleaning, transformation of the database and auditing of 

the data. 



6406

ISSN: 2347-1697 




3. Ross Gayleret. al. defines the professional fraudster, formalises the main types and sub 

types of known fraud and presents the nature of data evidence collected within affected 

industries. Within the business context of mining the data to achieve higher cost savings, 

this research presents methods and techniques together with their problems. Compared 

to all related reviews on fraud detection, this survey covers much more technical articles 

and is the only one, to the best of our knowledge, which proposes alternative data and 

solutions from related domains. 

4. Qi Liu et. al. develop sophisticated antifraud approaches incorporating data mining, 

machine learning or other methods. This introduce some preliminary knowledge of U.S. 

health care system and its fraudulent behaviours, analyses the characteristics of 

healthcare data and reviews and compares currently proposed fraud detection 

approaches using healthcare data in the literature as well as their corresponding data preprocess 

methods. Also a novel healthcare fraud detection method including geo-location 

information is proposed. 

5. Dr. YuZhanget. al. explore show predictive fraud detection systems developed using 

ICD-9 claims data will initially react to the introduction of ICD-10. We have developed 

a basic fraud detection system incorporating both unsupervised and supervised learning 

methods in order to examine the potential fraudulence of both ICD-9 and ICD-10 claims 

in a predictive environment. Using this system, we are able to analyze the ability and 

performance of statistical methods trained using ICD-9 data to properly identify 

fraudulent ICD-10 claims. This research makes contributions to the domains of medical 

coding, healthcare informatics, and fraud detection. 

6. Guido Cornelis van Capelleveen proposed methodology enabled successful 

identification of fraudulent activity in several cases; however linking these identified 

incidents with irrefutable de jure fraud proved to be a difficult process. From 17 top 

suspicions analysed, we reported eventually 12 of those to officials, a precision rate of 

approximately 71%. In the two interviews conducted with Medicaid Fraud Experts, 

experiences were gained on requirements for the design of the analytics and an effective 

implementation of the method. They found that outlier based predictors are not likely to 

succeed as fraud classification technology, though it explored an important role as 

decision supportive technology for resource allocation of fraud audits. 

III. MODELLING 

There is a growing concern among the insurance industry about the increasing incidence of 

abuse and fraud in health insurance. FICCI sub group on health insurance fraud was setup to 

deliberate upon the issue and come up with a working paper on health insurance abuse and 

fraud management for the practitioners within the health insurance industry and to suggest a 

framework of best practices. Health care has become a major expenditure in the US since 

1980. Both the size of the health care sector and the enormous volume of money involved 

make it an attractive fraud target. According to the Office of Management and Budget, in 

2010, about 9%, or around $47.9 billion of the US’S Medicare expenditure was lost due to 



6407

ISSN: 2347-1697 




fraud1. Therefore, effective fraud detection is important for reducing the cost of health care 

system. Detecting health care fraud and abuse, however, needs intensive medical 

knowledge. 

However, fraud and abuse in medical claims have become an important concern within 

public and private health insurance companies in Chile the last years due to the increasing 

losses in revenues.[8] In addition, these losses entail an increase in operation costs 

diminishing the resources for health benefits. This increase does not match with an 

epidemiologist change of the population, but with an inadequate use of the healthcare 

system. In 1986, a public institution called COMPIN was created by the government for 

handling complaints of the affiliates against the ISAPREs. COMPIN has the faculty for 

modifying the ISAPRE’s resolution. Doctor Affiliate complicities are difficult tight. The 

labor instability generates potential unemployment which motivates an illegal use of these 

benefits. Objective parameters for the granting of medical claims do not exist. The 

exponential increase of the number of medical claims complicates an appropriate control. 

Processing medical claims is an exhausting manual task that involves analysis, checking, 

resolution and audit of high volumes of medical claims daily within a limited period of three 

days from their reception.[9] These control activities are done by few medical experts who 

have the responsibility of approving, modifying or rejecting the subsidies solicited. 

Therefore, discovering fraudulent and abusive medical claims is not an easy process for 

human’s experts.Considering ECM and SVM, The block diagram for the hybrid model of 

fraud detection. Steps in Hybrid Model Construction: 

Doctor bills patients for the services/ equipment given to them during their treatment. 

Patient files claims to the insurance company. 

Claims are submitted to the Hybrid Framework wherein clustering (ECM) is followed by 

classification (SVM) to detect the fraudulent claims. 

There is an expert who tags the fraudulent claims for further investigation with the 

insurance company. 

The legitimate claims are further passed to the insurance company and those claims are 

paid to the patients. 

Figure 3: Block Diagram 



6408

ISSN: 2347-1697 




The medical industry has also taken advantage of 3D printing's ability to make unique 

objects that might otherwise be tough to build using traditional methods. U.S. surgeons 

implanted a 3D-printed skull piece to replace 75 percent of a patient's skull during an 

operation in March 2013. Researchers also built a 3D-printed ear mold that served as the 

framework for a bioengineered ear with living cells. 

The spread of 3D printing technology around the world could also shrink geographical 

distances for both homeowners and businesses. Online marketplaces already allow 

individuals to upload 3D-printable designs for objects and sell them anywhere in the world. 

Rather than pay hefty shipping fees and import taxes, sellers can simply arrange for a sold 

product to be printed at whatever 3D printing facility is closest to the buyer. 


In this paper the study of review data mining uncovers patterns hidden in data to deliver 

knowledge. Data mining involves mainly classification and clustering techniques. 

Considering the advantages and disadvantages of most of the classification and clustering 

techniques, ECM is chosen as the clustering technique because the data flows in 

continuously and there is a need to cluster dynamic data and SVM as classification 

techniques in it provides the scalability and usability that are needed in a good quality data 

mining system. 

V. REFERENCES 

[1] Min Nelofar Kureshi, Syed Sibte Raza Abidi,“A Predictive Model for Personalized 

Therapeutic Interventions in Non-small Cell Lung Cancer”, IEEE Journal of Health 

Informatics Vol. 20, No.1 January 2016. 

[2] Vipula Rawte, G Anuradha, “Fraud Detection in Health Insurance using Data Mining 

Techniques”, International conference of ICCTCT 2015, Mumbai. 

[3] Dr. Biswendu Bardhan. “Frauds in Health Insurance”, 

http://healthcare.financialexpress.com/200711/market13.shtml. 

[4] Melih Kirlidoga, Cuneyt Asuk(2012) A fraud detection approach with data mining in health 

insurance. Procedia Social and Behavioral Sciences62 (2012 ) 989 - 994. 

[5] Dan Ventura. Class Lecture, Topic: “SVM Example.” BYU University of Physics and 

Mathematical Sciences, Mar. 12, 2009. 

[6] Shunzhi Zhu, Yan Wang, Yun Wu, “Health Care Fraud Detection Using Nonnegative Matrix 

Factorization”, The 6 th International Conferenceon Computer Science & Education (ICCSE 

2011) August 3-5, 2011. Super Star Virgo, Singapore. 

[7] Zhongyuan Zhang, Tao Li, Chris Ding, Xiangsun Zhang, “Binary Matrix Factorization with 

Applications”, Proceeding ICDM ’07 Proceedings of the 2007 Seventh IEEE International 

Conference on Data Mining Pages 391-400. 

[8] Mohammad Sajjad Ghaemi. Class Lecture, Topic: “Clustering and Nonnegative Matrix 

Factorization”. DAMAS LAB, Computer Science and Software Engineering Department, 

Laval University. Apr.12, 2013. 

[9] Haesun Park. Class Lecture, Topic: “Nonnegative Matrix Factorization for Clustering”. School 

of Computational Science and Engineering Georgia Institute of Technology Atlanta, GA, 

USA, July 2012. 

[10] Fashoto Stephen G., Owolabi Olumide, Sadiku J., Gbadeyan Jacob A, “Application of Data 

Mining Technique for Fraud Detection in Health Insurance Scheme Using Knee-Point K- 



6409

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Means Algorithm”, Australian Journal of Basic and Applied Sciences, 7(8): 140-144, 2013 

ISSN 1991-8178. 

[11] Williams, G.& Huang, Z.(1997). Mining the Knowledge Mine: The Hot Spots Methodology 

for Mining Large Real World Databases. Proc. of the 10th Australian Joint Conference on 

Artificial Intelligence. 

[12] Wong, W., Moore, A., Cooper, G. & Wagner, M. (2003). Bayesian Network Anomaly Pattern 

Detection for Detecting Disease Outbreaks. Proc. Of ICML 03, 217-223. 


Pranali, P. , Namrata, G. (2017) :: “Data Mining Techniques for Fraud Detection in 

Health Insurance” International Journal of Informative & Futuristic Research (ISSN: 




6410

www.ijifr.com 



Privacy Preserving Data Leak Detection 


Computer 

Engineering 

Key Words 

data leakage, fingerprint technique, content-scrutiny job, 

Sarisha Kumari.S 

M.Tech. Student, 


Musaliar College of Engineering and Technology 

Pathanamthitta, Kerala 

Abstract 

Leaked sensitive data records has amplified dramatically during the last 

few years, from 412 million in 2012 to 822 million in 2013 [1]. Security 

firms, research institutions and government organizations are the main 

areas facing the data leakage problem. Data leak simply means that a 

secret data get exposed or data leakage is the unauthorized transmission of 

data. Unintentional or accidental data leakage is also unauthorized. Human 

mistakes are one of the main causes of data leak. A person mistakenly 

sending a confidential message to all contacts in his e-mail is a data leak 

caused by human mistake. Data leakage is defined as the accidental or 

unintentional distribution of private or sensitive data to an illegal entity. 

Sensitive data in companies and organizations include intellectual property 

(IP), financial information, patient information, private credit-card data, 

and other information depending on the business and the industry. This 

paper proposes a data-leak detection solution environment. Can design, 

implement, and evaluate fingerprint technique that enhances data privacy 

throughout data-leak detection operations. It enables the data owner to 

securely delegate the content-scrutiny job to DLD providers without 

revealing the sensitive data. 


Since there is a rapid growth in data-leak instances, it is necessary to take few steps against 

data loss. Data leakage detection is necessary to solve the issue. After detecting whether any 

data leakage has occurred or not, can take measures to overcome it. A data-leak detection 

solution can be outsourced and be deployed in a semi honest detection environment. Data 

leak detection (DLD) provider is used, which is responsible to detect whether any data leak 

occurred. Rabin fingerprint and fuzzy fingerprint technique can be designed, implemented, 

. 



6411

ISSN: 2347-1697 




and evaluated to enhance data privacy during data-leak detection operations. It enables the 

data owner to securely delegate the content-inspection task to DLD provider without 

exposing the sensitive data. Using our detection method, the DLD provider, who is 

modelled as a honest-but-curious adversary, can only gain limited knowledge about the 

sensitive data from either the released digests, or the content being inspected. Using 

proposed techniques, an Internet service provider (ISP) can carry out exposure on its 

customer’s traffic securely and provide data-leak detection as an add-on service for its 

clients. Otherwise individuals can mark their own sensitive data and ask the administrator of 

their local network to detect data leaks for them. There are two goals: 

Security Goal 

Privacy Goal 

Security Goal 

The sensitive data is accidentally leaked by a legitimate user termed as inadvertent data 

leak.DLD provider can be used to detect this type of leaks over supervised network 

channels. 

Privacy Goal 

Prevent the DLD provider from gaining knowledge of sensitive data during the 

detection process. The DLD provider is semi-honest , who follows proposed protocols to 

carry out the operations, but may attempt to gain knowledge about the sensitive data of the 

data owner. The DLD provider is given digests of sensitive data from the data owner and 

the content of network traffic to be examined. From the detection viewpoint, a 

straightforward method is for the DLD provider to be attentive and report if any sensitive 

fingerprint matches the fingerprints from the traffic. Then, the DLD provider learns the 

resultant shingle, as it knows the content of the packet. Therefore, the central challenge is 

to prevent the DLD provider from learning the sensitive values even in data-leak 

scenarios. 

II. PRIOR WORK 

There have been several advances in understanding the privacy needs or the privacy 

requirement of security applications. This paper identifies the privacy needs in an 

outsourced data-leak detection service and provides a systematic solution to enable 

privacy-preserving DLD services. Shingle with Rabin fingerprint was used previously for 

identifying similar spam messages in a collaborative setting, as well as collaborative 

worm containment, virus scan , and fragment detection. In comparison, we tackle the 

unique data-leak detection problem in an outsourced setting where the DLD provider is 

not fully trusted. GoCloudDLP is a little different, which allows its customers to 

outsource the detection to a fully honest DLD provider. Our fuzzy fingerprint method 

differs from these solutions and enables its adopter to provide data leak detection as a 

service. The customer or data owner does not need to fully trust the DLD provider using 

our approach. Bloom filter is a space-saving data structure for set membership test, and it 

is used in network security from network layer to application layer. The fuzzy Bloom 

Sarisha Kumari.S :: Privacy Preserving Data Leak Detection 

6412

ISSN: 2347-1697 




filter invented in constructs a special Bloom filter that probabilistically sets the 

corresponding filter bits to 1’s. Although it is designed to support a resource-sufficient 

routing scheme, it is a potential privacy-preserving technique. We do not invent a variant 

of Bloom filter for our fuzzy fingerprint, and our fuzzification process is separate from 

membership test. The advantage of separating fingerprint fuzzification from membership 

test is that it is flexible to test whether the fingerprint is sensitive with or without 

fuzzification. Besides fingerprint-based detection, other approaches can be applied to 

data-leak detection. 

III. PROPOSED SYSTEM 

Operations Include: 

PREPROCESS: Run by the data holder to organize the digests of sensitive data. 

RELEASE: Data owner sends the preprocessed data digests to the DLD provider for 

detection purpose. 

MONITOR and DETECT: DLD provider collects the outgoing traffic of particular 

organization and calculates digests of traffic content, and identifies potential leaks. 

REPORT: DLD provider returns data-leak alerts to the data owner where there may be false 

positives along with true positives. 

POSTPROCESS: Data owner pinpoints true data-leak instances. The protocol is based on 

strategically computing data similarity, specifically the quantitative similarity between the 

sensitive information and the observed network traffic. High similarity indicates potential 

data leak. 

Figure 1: Data leak detection model 

3.1Shingles and Rabin Fingerprints 

The DLD provider receives digests of sensitive data from the data owner. The data 

owner uses Rabin fingerprint and fuzzy fingerprint algorithm to generate hard to- reverse 

(i.e., one-way) digests through polynomial modulus operation. First generates small 

fragments of data (sensitive data or network traffic), which preserves the local features of 

the data. Each fragment will be of fixed size and fragments are called shingle (q-gram). If 

a fragment consists of 3 elements, then it is 3-gram. Example: Data – “abcdef” can be 

divided into four fragments of fixed size {abc, bcd, cde, def}. Since there are three 

elements in each fragment, it is 3-gram. Each fragment is treated as a polynomial q(x) 


6413

ISSN: 2347-1697 




using it’s ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) values and 

fingerprint of each fragment is calculated. Each coefficient of q(x) is one bit in fragment. 

For above example, fragment abc can be represented in polynomial form as : q(x)= x + 

x + . Rabin fingerprints are computed by performing polynomial modulus operations, 

and also implemented with XOR, shift, and table look-up operations. The shingle-andfingerprint 

process is defined as follows approach can tolerate sensitive data modification 

to some extent, e.g., inserted tags, small amount of character substitution, and lightly 

reformatted data. In fingerprinting, each shingle is treated as a polynomial q(x). Each 

coefficient of q(x), i.e., ci, is one bit in the shingle. q(x) is mod by a selected irreducible 

polynomial p(x). Rabin fingerprint f = q(x) mod p(x) 

f = c 1 x k−1 + c 2 x k−2 + . . . + c k−1 x + c k mod p(x) …………….. (1) 

p(x) is an irreducible polynomial. 

3.2 Fuzzy Fingerprint Protocol 

Rabin fingerprints are passed through certain logical operations to obtain fuzzy 

fingerprints. 

1) PREPROCESS: This action is run by the data owner on each piece of sensitive 

data. 

a) The data owner chooses four public parameters (q, p(x)). q is the length of a shingle. p(x), 

is an irreducible polynomial used in Rabin fingerprint. Each fingerprint is p f –bit long. The 

positions of 1’s and 0’s in M indicate the bits to preserve and to randomize in the 

fuzzification, respectively. 

b) The data owner computes S, which is the set of all Rabin fingerprints of the piece of 

sensitive data. 

c) The data owner transforms each fingerprint f ∈ S into a fuzzy fingerprint f * with 

randomized bits (specified by the mask M). The procedure is described as follows: for each 

f ∈ S, the data owner generates a random p f -bit binary string f˙, mask out the bits not 

randomized by f˙’ = (NOT M) AND f ˙ (1’s in M indicate positions of bits not to 

randomize), and fuzzify f with f * = f XOR f˙’. Bit value of fingerprint x +9x + 

x can be calculated as: ∗ +9 ∗ + ∗ =90679. Similarly bit value 

of each fingerprint is calculated. 

f* = ((NOT M) AND f ˙) XOR f ……………..(2) 

All fuzzy fingerprints are collected and form the output of this operation, the fuzzy 

fingerprint set, S*. 

2) RELEASE: This operation is run by the data owner. The fuzzy fingerprint set S* 

obtained by PREPROCESS is released to the DLD provider for use in the detection, along 

with the public parameters (q, p(x)). The data owner keeps S for use in the subsequent 

POSTPROCESS operation. 

3) MONITOR: This operation is run by the DLD provider. The DLD provider 

monitors the network traffic T from the data owner’s organization. Identifies TCP flows and 

extract contents in a TCP session as T˜. 


6414

ISSN: 2347-1697 




4) DETECT: This operation is run by the DLD provider on each T˜ as follows. 

a) The DLD provider first computes the set of Rabin fingerprints of traffic content T˜ based 

on the public parameters. The set is denoted as T. 

b) The DLD provider tests whether each fingerprint f’∈ T is also in S*using the fuzzy 

equivalence test. 

E( f ‘, f *) = NOT (M AND ( f ‘ XOR f *))…………… (3) 

c) The DLD provider aggregates the outputs from the preceding step and raises alerts based 

on a threshold. 

5) REPORT: If DETECTION on T˜ yields an alert, the DLD provider reports the set 

of detected candidate leak instances ˆT to the data owner. 

6) POSTPROCESS: After receiving ˆT, the data owner test every f ‘ ∈ ˆT to see 

whether it is in S. 

Similarly, leaked images can also be detected by applying Rabin and Fuzzy fingerprint 

methods. Data owner can create fingerprint for image or part of a large image. Since even a 

small image is comprised of large number of pixels, it will generate number of sentences for 

each image. ASCII value corresponding to each pixel is calculated to form sentences. 

Sentence will be grouped into fragments of three elements each. Each of the three elements 

in all fragments are converted into polynomial form. For example: q(x)= x + x + . 

Rabin fingerprint is generated by performing modulus operation. Fuzzy fingerprint of image 

can be generated by performing the same logical operations that were done on document 

data: 

f* = ((NOT M) AND f ˙) XOR f 

Finally fingerprints can be sending to data leak detector, which is responsible to find out the 

data leak if any. Data leak detector will capture the data in the network traffic of that 

particular data owner and convert it into fingerprints. Comparison operation will result true 

positives along with number of false positives. Word documents will return very few false 

positives but image documents output consist of number of false positives. 

IV. EXPERIMENTAL RESULT 

Data leakage detection is performed and sends back to the data owner that which all data 

were leaked. Privacy of data is preserved by using fingerprint techniques. 


6415

ISSN: 2347-1697 




VI. CONCLUSIONN 

A data leak detection solution environment has been successfully proposed. Designed, 

implemented, and evaluated fingerprint technique that enhances data privacy during dataleak 

detection operation. It enables the data owner to securely delegate the contentinspection 

task to DLD providers without exposing the sensitive data. Security and privacy 

goal is achieved throughout the detection operation. Only the fingerprints of data are 

sending to the detector to perform detection operation. After performing comparison 

operation, data leak detector will find out the potential data leaks. Detection of word as well 

as images can be performed by this method. 


[1] X. Shu and D. Yao, “Data leak detection as a service,” in Proc. 8th Int.Conf. Secur. Privacy 

Commun. Netw., 2012, pp. 222–240. 

[2] Risk Based Security. (Feb. 2014). Data Breach Quick-View: An Executive’s Guide to 2013 Data 

Breach Trends.[Online]. Available: https://www.riskbasedsecurity.com/reports/2013- 

DataBreachQuickView.pdf, accessed Oct. 2014. 

[3] Ponemon Institute. (May 2013). 2013 Cost of Data Breach Study: Global Analysis. 

[Online].Available: 

https://www4.symantec.com/mktginfo/whitepaper/053013_GL_NA_WP_Ponemon-2013-Cost-of-a- 

Data-Breach Report_daiNA_cta72382.pdf, accessed Oct. 2014. 

[4] Identity Finder. Discover Sensitive Data Prevent Breaches DLP Data Loss Prevention. [Online]. 

Available: http://www.identityfinder.com/, accessed Oct. 2014. 

[5] K. Borders and A. Prakash, “Quantifying information leaks in outbound web traffic,” in Proc. 

30th IEEE Symp. Secur. Privacy, May 2009, pp. 129–140. 

[6] H. Yin, D. Song, M. Egele, C. Kruegel, and E. Kirda, “Panorama: Capturing system-wide 

information flow for malware detection and analysis,” in Proc. 14th ACM Conf. Comput. Commun. 

Secur., 2007, pp. 116–127. 

[7] K. Borders, E. V. Weele, B. Lau, and A. Prakash, “Protecting confidential data on personal 

computers with storage capsules,” in Proc. 18th USENIX Secur. Symp., 2009, pp. 367–382. 

[8] A. Nadkarni and W. Enck, “Preventing accidental data disclosure in modern operating systems,” 

in Proc. 20th ACM Conf. Comput. Commun. Secur., 2013, pp. 1029–1042. 

[9] A. Kapravelos, Y. Shoshitaishvili, M. Cova, C. Kruegel, and G. Vigna, “Revolver: An 

automated approach to the detection of evasiveweb-based malware,” in Proc. 22nd USENIX Secur. 

Symp., 2013, pp. 637–652. 

[10] X. Jiang, X. Wang, and D. Xu, “Stealthy malware detection and monitoring through VMMbased 

‘out-of-the-box’ semantic view reconstruction,” ACM Trans. Inf. Syst. Secur., vol. 13, no. 2, 

2010, p. 12. 

[11] Matt Curtin, Kent Information Services, Inc.(march 1997). 

[12] G. Karjoth and M. Schunter, “A privacy policy model for enterprises,” in Proc. 15th IEEE 

Comput. Secur. Found. Workshop, Jun. 2002, pp. 271–281. 

[13] J. Jung, A. Sheth, B. Greenstein, D. Wetherall, G. Maganis, and T. Kohno, “Privacy oracle: A 

system for finding application leaks with black box differential testing,” in Proc. 15th ACM Conf. 

Comput. Commun. Secur., 2008, pp. 279–288. 

[14] Y. Jang, S. P. Chung, B. D. Payne, and W. Lee, “Gyrus: A framework for user-intent 

monitoring of text-based networked applications,” in Proc. 23rd USENIX Secur. Symp., 2014, pp. 

79–93. 

[15] K. Xu, D. Yao, Q. Ma, and A. Crowell, “Detecting infection onset with behavior-based 

policies,” in Proc. 5th Int. Conf. Netw. Syst. Secur., Sep. 2011, pp. 57–64. 

[16] M. O. Rabin, “Fingerprinting by random polynomials,” Dept. Math., Hebrew Univ. Jerusalem, 


6416

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Jerusalem, Israel, Tech. Rep. TR-15-81, 1981. 

[17] A. Shabtai et al., A Survey of Data Leakage Detection and Prevention Solutions, 

5SpringerBriefs in Computer Science, DOI 10.1007/978-1-4614-2053-8_2, © The Author(s) 2012. 

[18] Stallings, W. (1995). Network and internetwork security: principles and practice (Vol.1). 

Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall. 

[19] Sandip A. Kale, S.V.Kulkarni International Journal of Advanced Research in Computer and 

Communication Engineering Vol. 1, Issue 9, November 2012. 

[20] Chandni Bhatt and Richa Sharma Chandni Bhatt et al, / (IJCSIT) International Journal of 

Computer Science and Information Technologies, Vol. 5 (2) , 2014, 2556-2558 

[21] B. Bloom. Space/time tradeoffs in in hash coding with allowable errors. Communications of the 

ACM, 13(7):422-426, 1970. 

[22] F. Bonomi, M. Mitzenmacher, R. Panigrahy, S. Singh, and G. Varghese. Beyond Bloom filters: 

From approximate membership checks to approximate state machines. To appear in Proc. of 

SIGCOMM, 2006. 


Kumari, S. S. (2017) :: “Privacy Preserving Data Leak Detection” International 


January 2017, pp. 6411-6417, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/033 


6417

www.ijifr.com 



Segmentation of Handwritten Tamil 

Character from Palm Script using 

Histogram Approach 


Key Words 

Computer 

Engineering 

Tamil Palm Manuscript, Line Segmentation,Character Segmentation, 

Vertical Projection, Bounding Box 

1 st B. Kiruba Assistant Professor, 

2 nd A. Nivethitha Department of Computer Science & Engineering 

3 rd Dr. M. Vimaladevi Hindusthan Institute of Technology, Coimbatore 

Abstract 

Tamil Palm script character segmentation is one of the difficult phases in 

machine recognition. Tamil is the most popular script in India. Tamil palm 

script consist of vowels, consonants and various modifiers. Individual letter 

decides the accuracy of character recognition technique hence proper 

segmentation is needed. This paper presents an image segmentation of 

Tamil handwriting from palm leaf manuscripts. The process is includes of 

three steps: background elimination to separate text by Otsu‘s algorithm, 

line segmentation and character segmentation. A simple histogram based 

approach to segment Tamil palm script character is proposed in this paper. 

Various challenges in segmentation of Tamil script are also discussed. 


Tamil character segmentation from palm manuscript is an important task for Recognition 

System. Segmentation is the method of splitting the image into text lines, words and then 

into characters which are particularly useful for classification. Segmenting character from 

palm manuscript is extremely challenging, while the characters structure and content differ 

significantly. The correctness of the OCR system depends on the segmentation. If the 

characters are segmented correctly the recognition system gives best results. Regions or 

objects are divided from an image in segmentation phase. Mainly segmentation, tries to 

extract essential component of the script, which are certainly characters. This is desirable 

because the classifier recognizes these characters only [1]. Segmentation phase is also 

critical in contributing to this inaccuracy due to touching characters, which the classifier 

. 



6418

ISSN: 2347-1697 




cannot correctly recognize. Even in good quality documents, some nearby font touch each 

other due to improper scanning resolution [2]. The organization of the paper is as follows 

feature of Tamil Script are described in section 2, section 3 illustrate about the palm 

manuscript. Section 4 describes the framework of proposed system which includes 

preprocessing techniques and segmentation algorithms, Section 5 presents experimental 

results and Section 6 describes the conclusion and future works. Section 7 provides the 

references. 

II. FEATURES OF TAMIL SCRIPT 

Tamil is a traditional language which is broadly spoken in most part of the south India. 

There are 12 vowels, 18 consonants and one special character present in unique Tamil 

Script. Each vowel combined by pure consonant to create a value of 216 consonant-vowel 

(CV) combinations. These add up to a total of 247 Tamil characters. Tamil Language 

alphabetic system is derived from the prehistoric Brahmi script which serves as a base for 

most of the Indian languages. The vowels and consonants of Tamil alphabet set are given in 

the table 1.1: 

Table 1.1 Modern Tamil Character Set 

Vowels அ, ஆ, இ, ஈ, உ , ஊ ,எ , ஏ , ஐ , ஒ , ஓ , 

ஔ 

Constants க், ங் , ச் , ஞ் , ட் , ண் ,த் , ந் , ப் ,ம் , ய் 

Grantha 

Aytam 

,ர் ,ல் , வ் ,ழ் , ள் , ற் , ன் 

க், ஷ், ஸ் 

ஃ 

A well developed handwritten character Recognition system is still not available for 

Tamil language. The main reasons for this are: 

1. Tamil Language has a very large character set 

2. Letter structure is very complex 

3. Due to complex letter structure, writing styles of people vary significantly 

4. There is no Tamil character database that exists for testing purposes in the public 

domain. 

III. PALM LEAF DOCUMENT IMAGE 

Palm leaf manuscript is one of the writing medium in India especially in Southern India. 

However palm leaf writing was accomplished since the prehistoric times its precise origin is 

still unclear. Agrawal stated that, “It is hard to say exactly when the palm-leaf begins to be 

used for writing. There is no scope of palm-leaf manuscripts in India before the 10th 

century. However, the palm-leaf was certainly in use before than this from the time when 

it’s mentioned as a writing material in several mythical works and its picture representation 

B. Kiruba, A. Nivethitha, Dr. M. Vimaladevi:: Segmentation of 

Handwritten Tamil Character from Palm Script using 


6419

ISSN: 2347-1697 




can be seen in several sculptures and monuments [3]. Palm leaf manuscripts are special 

from other documents. The major troubles with them investigation are deprived quality 

(fragility and deterioration over age),Poor contrast, holes, ghosting noise, spots on the 

media, constricted spaced lines with overlapping and touching components, abnormal 

varying shapes, and different styles of characters, which depend on the writer and even the 

era of writing. 

In general, Palm leaf images changes to distorted images due to the presence of noise, low 

or high contrast both in the edge area and image area. Removal of distortion, edge or 

boundary improvement, self regulation edge detection, variance adjustment is included in 

preprocessing stage and characters are finally segmented. Various enhancement techniques 

are necessary for improving the difference stretch in palm leaf images [4] because much 

kind of noises damages the quality of palm manuscripts. Different techniques for sequential 

manuscript image enhancement are determined by the purpose of improving individual 

readability while maintaining the original look and feel of the document. The current printed 

document, also palm leaf documents images are typically crucial to analyses. 

Palm 

manuscripts 

Preprocessing 

Background elimination using 

Otsu thresholding 

Segmentation 

Line segmentation 

Character 

segmentation 

Figure 1: Tamil Character Segmentation from Palm Manuscripts 

IV. FRAMEWORK FOR PROPOSED SYSTEM 

The Tamil character segmentation from palm manuscript process is shown above in the 

figure 4.1. We performed our experiments over a database generated by Collecting 15 Tamil 

palm manuscript samples and scanned by optical scanner. The image files are stored in jpg 

format. 

4.1 IMAGE PREPROCESSING 

Data are collected every time for recognition and optically scanned image. Text is 

converting into digital form by using a flatbed scanner having resolution between 100 and 

600 dpi and stored. These picture elements such as pixels may have values of 0 or 1 for 

binary images, 0– 255 for gray-scale images and three channels of 0–255 color i.e. RGB 

values for color images. This collected raw data should be further analyzed to get useful 

information. Such processing includes the following: 

4.1.1 RGB TO GRAY CONVERSION 

The optically scanned palm script is stored as a JPEG image. The image may save as 

other formats such as BMP; TIFF etc. are also used for recognition. All these images are in 




6420

ISSN: 2347-1697 




RGB format are converted into gray scale as shown below in the figure 2, then the RGB 

values for each pixel and make as output a distinct value reflecting the intensity of that 

pixel. The averages of each channel are contributed as (R+B+C)/3.The value of a pixel lies 

under 0 to 1 or under 0 to 255 depending upon its class. 

Figure 2: Gray Scale Image 

Figure 3: Binary image 

4.1.2 THRESHOLDING USING OTSU’S ALGORITHM 

Thresholding is a main technique in image segmentation applications. Otsu 

technique is kind of global thresholding in which it depend only gray value of the image. 

The basic suggestion of thresholding is to decide on a best gray-level threshold value for 

separating objects of interest in an image from the background based on their gray-level 

distribution. The gray-level histogram of an image is generally considered as well-organized 

tools for improvement of thresholding algorithms. By turning all pixels below some 

threshold to zero and all pixels about that threshold to one, thresholding creates binary 

image which is shown in the above figure4.3. If g(x, y) is a threshold account of f(x, y) at 

various global thresholds T, it can be defined as [4] 

g(x, y) = 1 if f(x, y) ≥ T 

= 0 otherwise 

4.1.2 SKEW DETECTION AND CORRECTION 

Handwritten Palm manuscript may initially be skewed or skewness may introduce in 

palm script scanning process. This effect is accidental in many real cases, and it should be 

eliminated because it effectively decreases the accuracy of the consecutive processes such 

as segmentation. Skewness is corrected by using projection profile Analysis[5]. A twofold 

image into one-dimensional array (projection profile) conversion is known as projection. 

Each line in projection profile has a value that produce a number of black pixels in the 

corresponding row of the image and lines on document are represented as horizontal 

histogram profile.For those images contain zero skewed angle, the horizontal projection 

profile has channel which is equal with the space between the lines. And also the 




6421

ISSN: 2347-1697 




maximum peak height which is equal to text lines height present in document images. 

Therefore, this method calculates the difference in projection profile at a number of 

dissimilar angles is equal to angle that have the most difference. 

4.2 SEGMENTATION 

After the image is preprocessed using methods discussed in section 4.1, histogram 

projections in y direction are obtained in order to perform Line segmentation and then x 

histogram projections for character segmentation. The process of segmentation mainly 

follows the following pattern: 

1) Identify the text lines in the page. 

2) Finally identify individual character in each line. 

4.2.1 LINE SEGMENTATION 

Using global horizontal projection profile each line in a given image are identified [4]. It is 

used to calculate sum of all white pixels on each row and construct subsequent histogram. 

The process of line segmentation is as follows [6]: 

Figure 4: Histogram of the image 

Step 1: Horizontally scan the preprocessed image and find the number of white pixels in 

each row. 

Step 2: Plot the histogram in y direction for the white pixel count for the image. 

Step 3: Scan the histogram projection to find first white pixel count with zero and remember 

that y coordinate as y1. 

Step 4: To find white pixel counts to be non zero since the characters would have started 

continuous histogram projection scanning is needed. 

Step 5: Finally we get the first white pixel count as zero and remember that y coordinate as 

y2. 

Step 6: Scan the image from y1 to y2 rows for the segmented line. 

Step7: Clear y1 and y2. 

Step 8: Repeat the above steps till the end of the histogram. 

4.2.2 CHARACTER SEGMENTATION 

To segment each character present in the database must follow the below process: 

Step 1: Initially Tamil palm manuscript is scanned by using optical scanner. 

Step 2: Convert Palm script scanned image to gray image by using Matlab function. 




6422

ISSN: 2347-1697 




Step 3: Gray image converted to binary image by using Otsu’s thresholding algorithm 

Step 4: To normalize image against thickness of the character, thinning operation is done by 

using Matlab bwmorph function. 

Step 5: Calculate the white pixel in each column. 

Step 6: Find the region which contain single white pixel. 

Step7: Substitute all such columns by 1. 

Step8: Invert the image to make such columns as 0 and text characters will have original 

pixels. 

Step9: By using standard Matlab function plot the Bounding Box for characters. 

Step10: Extract and save the segmented character in separate file as shown in the figure 5 

Figure 5: Segmented Characters 

5. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS 

In this research, segmentation scheme on 75 different script line used and it totally 

contains 2098 characters are found in script line. From the experiment, total number of lines 

recognized of 96 % accuracy and boundary box algorithm bound the characters of 97% 

result and characters found correctly were 87% accuracy. Different script segmentation 

detail is shown in the following table 5.1. During character segmentation, the error occur 

because of Tamil Script include consonants are modified in various ways from left, right, 

up or down to form a meaningful letter. Independent upright lines in the words are wellknown 

as separate symbol by the algorithm used. For perfect segmentation, all the modifiers 

must be segmented so that their detection can be properly done. 

Table 5.1: Overall segmentation Recognized results 

Line segmentation Lines in the script Recognized line Accuracy 

75 72 96% 

Character Segmentation Characters in the script Recognized character Accuracy 

2098 1817 87% 

VI. CONCLUSION AND FUTURE WORK 

In this segmentation process the global horizontal projection algorithm is tested with 

several Tamil palm manuscript images and produce results as 87 %. This method provides 

robust results, but it could not exactly segment the overlapped lines. A heuristic techniques 

needs to be consideration of in case of overlapping lines and characters to recover the loss 

text. In future, the progress will aim at improve the recognition accuracy of the proposed 




6423

ISSN: 2347-1697 




system by using more data sets and provide solution to the overlapping line and character 

problem present in the ancient Tamil manuscripts. 


[1] Raghuraj Singh. S. Yadav and Prabhat Verma (2010) “Optical Character Recognition (OCR) 

for Printed Devnagari Script Using Artificial Neural Network”, International Journal of 

Computer Science & Communication, Vol. 1, No. 1, , pp. 91-95. 

[2] Vijay kumar and Pankaj K. Sengar (2010) “Segmentation of Printed Text in Devanagari 

Script and Gurmukhi Script”, International Journal of Computer Applications,Vol 3, No.8, 

pp. 24-29. 

[3] Zhixin Shi , Srirangaraj Setlur, Venu Govindaraju (2008), “Digital Enhancement of Palm 

Leaf Manuscript Images using Normalization Techniques”, IEEE conference, Computer 

Vision, Graphics & Image Processing, pp.687-692. 

[4] Vikas J Dongre , Vijay H Mankar (2011) ”Devanagri Document Segmentation 

using Histogram Approach”, “International Journal of Computer Science, Engineering and 

Information Technology (IJCSEIT), Vol.1, No.3, pp.68-73. 

[5] Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods (2007), “Digital Image Processing”, 2nd ed., 

Beijing: Publishing House of Electronics Industry. 

[6] Y. Lu, Tan, C. Lim (2003), "Improved nearest neighbor based approach toaccurate 

document skew estimation." In Document Analysis and Recognition, 2003. Proceedings. 

Seventh International Conference on, pp. 503-507. 

[7] Anupama ,N, Rupa, Ch, & Sreenivasa Reddy, E (2013), ”Character Segmentation for 

Telugu Image Document using Multiple Histogram Projections”, Global Journal of 

Computer Science and Technology Graphics & Vision, Vol. 13, Issue 5. 

[8] Mallikarjunaswamy, B.P, Karunakara K (2011), “Graph Based Approach for Background 

Elimination and Segmentation of the Image” , Research Journal of Computer Systems 

Engineering- An International Journal, Vol. 02, Issue 02. 

[9] Olarik Surinta and Rapeeporn Chamchong.Image segmentation of historical handwriting 

from palm leaf manuscript 2008 in IFIP International federation for Information processing, 

[10] Sagar,B.M, Shoba, G, Ramakanth Kumar, P. (2008), “Character Segmentation algorithms 

for kannada optical character Recognition, Proceedings of the 2008 International 

Conferenceon Wavelet Analysis and Pattern Recognition. 

[11] Nallapareddy Priyanka, Srikanta Pal, Ranju Mandal, (2010) “Line and Word Segmentation 

Approach for Printed Documents”, IJCA Special Issue on Recent Trends in Image 

Processing and Pattern Recognition-RTIPPR, pp 30-36. 


Kiruba, B., Nivethitha, A., Vimaladevi, M. (2017) :: “Segmentation of Handwritten 

Tamil Character from Palm Script using Histogram Approach” International 


January 2017, pp. 6418-6424, Paper ID: IJIFR/V4/E5/023 




6424

IJIFR VOLUME 4 ISSUE 5 , JANUARY 2017 SECTION 2

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?